Upload
herwagner
View
126
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
DESCRIPTION
Ford Ranger Manual
Citation preview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 1/266
FORD RANGER Owner's Manual
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 2/266
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest ofcontinuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any timewithout notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in aretrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2013
All rights reserved.
Part Number: DB39120609AC (CG3575en) 12/2013 20131209205442
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 3/266
IntroductionAbout This Manual...........................................7
Symbols Glossary.............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9Replacement Parts
Recommendation......................................10
Special Notices................................................10
Mobile CommunicationsEquipment.....................................................10
At a GlanceFront Exterior Overview.................................12
Rear Exterior Overview..................................13
Vehicle Interior Overview.............................14
Instrument Panel Overview.........................15
Child Safety Installing Child Seats.....................................18
Child Seat Positioning...................................21
Child Safety Locks..........................................23
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation..................................24Fastening the Safety Belts..........................24
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................25
Safety Belt Minder.........................................26
Supplementary RestraintsSystem
Principle of Operation...................................27
Driver Airbag.....................................................27
Passenger Airbag...........................................28Side Airbags.....................................................29
Driver Knee Airbag.........................................29
Side Curtain Airbags.....................................29
Keys and Remote ControlsGeneral Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................31
Remote Control................................................31
Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl............................................................33
Security Passive Anti-Theft System.........................34
Anti-Theft Alarm............................................34
LocksLocking and Unlocking.................................36
Steering WheelAdjusting the Steering Wheel...................39
Audio Control...................................................39
Voice Control...................................................40
Cruise Control.................................................40
Wipers and WashersWindshield Wipers..........................................41
Autowipers........................................................41
Windshield Washers.....................................42
Lighting
General Information......................................43
Lighting Control..............................................43
Autolamps........................................................44
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................44
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................44
Daytime Running Lamps.............................45
Front Fog Lamps............................................45
Rear Fog Lamps.............................................46
Headlamp Leveling.......................................46
Direction Indicators........................................47Approach Lamps............................................47
Interior Lamps..................................................47
Windows and MirrorsPower Windows.............................................49
Interior Mirror...................................................50
Exterior Mirrors.................................................51
1
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Table of Contents
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 4/266
Sliding Windows.............................................52
Instrument Cluster
Gauges...............................................................53Warning Lamps and Indicators.................53
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............57
Information DisplaysGeneral Information......................................59
Clock....................................................................61
Trip Computer..................................................61
Personalized Settings...................................63
Climate ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................65
Air Vents............................................................65
Manual Climate Control..............................65
Automatic Climate Control........................68
Heated Windows and Mirrors....................70
SeatsSitting in the Correct Position....................72
Manual Seats...................................................72
Power Seats.....................................................74
Head Restraints..............................................76
Rear Seats.........................................................76
Heated Seats...................................................78
Auxiliary Power PointsAuxiliary Power Points..................................79
Cigar Lighter.....................................................79
Storage CompartmentsCup Holders.....................................................80
Glove Box..........................................................80
Center Console...............................................80
Cool Box.............................................................81
Ashtray................................................................81
Glasses Holder.................................................81
Rear Seat Armrest..........................................81
Starting and Stopping the
EngineGeneral Information......................................82
Ignition Switch.................................................82
Steering Wheel Lock.....................................82
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................83
Starting a Diesel Engine..............................84
Diesel Particulate Filter...............................84
Switching Off the Engine............................85
Fuel and RefuelingSafety Precautions........................................86
Fuel Quality......................................................87
Fuel Quality......................................................87
Running Out of Fuel......................................87
Catalytic Converter.......................................88
Refueling...........................................................88
Fuel Consumption.........................................90
Technical Specifications..............................91
TransmissionManual Transmission...................................93
Automatic Transmission.............................93
Four-Wheel DrivePrinciple of Operation...................................97
Using Four-Wheel Drive...............................97
Rear Axle
Limited Slip Differential.............................102Electronic Locking Differential................102
BrakesPrinciple of Operation.................................103
Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes...........................................................103
Parking Brake.................................................103
Hill Start Assist.............................................104
2
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Table of Contents
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 5/266
Traction ControlPrinciple of Operation................................106
Using Traction Control...............................106
Stability ControlPrinciple of Operation.................................107
Using Stability Control................................107
Terrain ResponsePrinciple of Operation................................109
Using Hill Descent Control.......................109
Parking AidsPrinciple of Operation...................................111
Parking Aid........................................................111
Rear View Camera.........................................113
Cruise ControlPrinciple of Operation..................................116
Using Cruise Control.....................................116
Load CarryingGeneral Information.....................................118
Luggage Covers..............................................118
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................120
Load Retaining Fixtures...............................121
Tailgate.............................................................124
TowingTowing a Trailer..............................................125
Trailer Sway Control....................................126
Recommended Towing Weights............126
Tow Ball............................................................129
Towing Points................................................130
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.......131
Driving HintsBreaking-In......................................................132
General Driving Points.................................132
Cold Weather Precautions........................132
Reduced Engine Performance.................132
Driving Through Water................................133
Floor Mats........................................................133
Roadside EmergenciesHazard Warning Flashers...........................135
First Aid Kit......................................................135
Warning Triangle...........................................135
Jump Starting the Vehicle.........................136
Fuses
Fuse Box Locations......................................138Fuse Specification Chart...........................140
Changing a Fuse...........................................149
MaintenanceGeneral Information....................................150
Opening and Closing the Hood...............150
Under Hood Overview - 2.5L Duratec-HE(122kW/165PS) - MI4.............................152
Under Hood Overview - 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel............154Under Hood Overview - 3.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel............156
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L Duratec-HE(122kW/165PS) - MI4.............................158
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi(Puma) Diesel/3.2L Duratorq-TDCi(Puma) Diesel...........................................158
Engine Oil Check...........................................158
Engine Coolant Check................................159
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................159Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................160
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........160
Washer Fluid Check......................................161
Changing the 12V Battery...........................161
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................161
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................161
Changing a Bulb............................................162
Bulb Specification Chart...........................168
3
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Table of Contents
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 6/266
Technical Specifications...........................169
Vehicle Care
Cleaning the Exterior....................................172Cleaning the Interior.....................................172
Repairing Minor Paint Damage................173
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................173
Wheels and TiresGeneral Information....................................174
Using Winter Tires........................................174
Using Snow Chains......................................174
Changing a Road Wheel............................174Technical Specifications...........................180
Capacities and Specific-ations
Vehicle Dimensions.....................................182
Towbar Dimensions.....................................187
Vehicle Identification Plate......................190
Vehicle Identification Number................190
Navigation introductionGeneral Information.....................................191
Road Safety.....................................................191
Navigation Quick startNavigation Quick start................................193
Navigation unit overviewNavigation unit overview...........................194
Loading the navigation data....................196
System settingsSystem settings.............................................197
Navigation systemRoute options menu..................................200
Route displays...............................................201
Traffic Message ChannelPrinciple of Operation................................202
Using TMC......................................................202
Map updatesMap updates.................................................203
Audio introductionImportant audio information..................204
Audio unit overviewAudio unit overview ...................................205
Audio System Security Security code..................................................213
Audio Unit Clock and DateDisplays
Setting the clock on the audio unit........214
Audio unit operationOn/off control................................................216
Sound button.................................................216
Waveband button........................................216
Station tuning control.................................216
Station preset buttons................................217
Autostore control..........................................217
Traffic information control........................218
Audio unit menusAutomatic volume control........................219
Digital signal processing (DSP)..............219
News broadcasts..........................................219
Alternative frequencies..............................219
Regional mode (REG)...............................220
Compact Disc PlayerCompact disc playback..............................221
Track selection...............................................221
4
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Table of Contents
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 7/266
Fast forward/reverse...................................221
Shuffle/random.............................................221
Repeat compact disc tracks.....................221
Compact disc track scanning..................222MP3 file playback.........................................222
MP3 display options...................................224
Ending compact disc playback..............225
Auxiliary input jackAuxiliary input jack......................................226
Audio system care
Antenna...........................................................227
Audio TroubleshootingAudio troubleshooting...............................228
TelephoneGeneral Information...................................229
Telephone setup..........................................229
Bluetooth setup...........................................230
Telephone controls......................................231
Using the telephone....................................231
Voice controlPrinciple of Operation................................234
Using voice control......................................234
Audio unit commands...............................235
Telephone commands..............................243
Climate control commands....................248
AppendicesType approvals.............................................250
Electromagnetic compatibility...............250
5
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Table of Contents
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 8/266
6
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 9/266
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. Werecommend that you take some time toget to know your vehicle by reading thismanual. The more that you know about it,the greater the safety and pleasure youwill get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any handheld devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.
Note: This manual describes productfeatures and options available throughoutthe range of available models, sometimeseven before they are generally available. It may describe options not fitted to your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models, so may appear different to you on your vehicle. However, the essential informationin the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral part of thevehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of acomponent as left-hand side or right-handside. The side is determined when facingforward in the seat.
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting theenvironment. Correct vehicle usage andthe authorized disposal of waste, cleaningand lubrication materials are significantsteps toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
7
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Introduction
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 10/266
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleumbased
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartmentrelease
Jack
Lighting control
Lock rear window
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
8
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Introduction
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 11/266
Panic alarm
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Service engine soon
Side airbag
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
Keep out of reach of children
Recyclable product
Do not dispose of in the trashbecause the material contains
lead
Use safety glasses whenhandling
DATA RECORDING
A large number of electronic componentsof your vehicle contain data storagemodules temporarily or permanentlystoring technical data about the conditionof the vehicle, events and errors.
In general, this technical informationdocuments the condition of parts,modules, systems or the environment:
• Operating conditions of systemcomponents (e.g. filling levels).
• Status messages of the vehicle and itsindividual components (e.g. number ofwheel revolutions/rotational speed,deceleration, lateral acceleration).
• Malfunction and defects in importantsystem components (e.g. lighting andbrake system).
• Vehicle reactions in particular drivingsituations (e.g. inflation of an airbag,activation of the stability regulationsystem).
• Environmental conditions (e.g.
temperature).These data are exclusively technical andhelp identification and correction of errorsas well as optimisation of vehiclefunctions. Motion profiles indicatingtravelled routes cannot be created withthese data.
If services are used (e.g. repair works,service processes, warranty cases, qualityassurance), employees of the service
network (including manufacturers) areable to read out this technical informationfrom the event and error data storagemodules using special diagnostic devices.If required, you will receive furtherinformation. After an error has beencorrected, these data are deleted from theerror storage module or they are constantlyoverwritten.
9
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Introduction
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 12/266
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 13/266
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend thatyou use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any hand-held devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicablelocal laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.
11
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Introduction
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 14/266
FRONT EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
See Locking and Unlocking (page 36).A
See Changing the Wiper Blades (page 161).BSee Maintenance (page 150).C
See Changing a Bulb (page 162).D
Tire pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 180).E
See Changing a Road Wheel (page 174).F
12
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
At a Glance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 15/266
REAR EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
Fuel filler flap. See Refueling (page 88).A
See Changing a Bulb (page 162).BAuxiliary battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 161).C
See Changing a Bulb (page 162).D
Tire pressure. See Technical Specifications (page 180).E
See Changing a Road Wheel (page 174).F
13
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
At a Glance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 16/266
VEHICLE INTERIOR OVERVIEW
See Transmission (page 93).A
See Locks (page 36).BSee Power Windows (page 49). See Exterior Mirrors (page 51).C
See Head Restraints (page 76).D
See Fastening the Safety Belts (page 24).E
See Rear Seats (page 76).F
See Parking Brake (page 103).G
14
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
At a Glance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 17/266
See Manual Seats (page 72). See Power Seats (page 74).H
See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 150).I
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Right-Hand Drive
15
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
At a Glance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 18/266
Left-Hand Drive
Door lock button. See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).
A
Audio unit. See Audio unitoverview (page 205).
B
Multi-functional display.C
Multi-function lever: Directionindicators. See Direction
Indicators (page 47). MainBeam. See Lighting Control(page 43). or Wiper lever. SeeWipers and Washers (page41).
D
Audio control. See AudioControl (page 39).
E
16
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
At a Glance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 19/266
Instrument cluster. See Gauges(page 53). SeeWarning Lampsand Indicators (page 53).
F
Multi-function lever: Directionindicators. See DirectionIndicators (page 47). MainBeam. See Lighting Control(page 43). or Wiper lever. SeeWipers and Washers (page41).
G
Exterior mirror control. SeeExterior Mirrors (page 51).
H
Headlamp levelling switch. See
Headlamp Leveling (page 46).
I
Air vents. See Air Vents (page65).
J
Bonnet release lever. SeeOpening and Closing theHood (page 150).
K
Driver side storagecompartment. See Glove Box(page 80).
L
Cruise control. See CruiseControl (page 116).
M
Ignition switch. See IgnitionSwitch (page 82).
N
Horn.O
Driver knee airbag. See Principleof Operation (page 27).
P
Stability control (ESP) switch.See Using Stability Control(page 107).
Q
Passenger airbag deactivationwarning lamp. See PassengerAirbag (page 28).
R
Auxiliary power sockets. SeeAuxiliary Power Points (page79).
S
Climate controls. See ManualClimate Control (page 65).
T
Auxiliary input and USB SeeAuxiliary input jack (page 226).or Auxiliary switches.
U
Hazard warning flasher switch.See Hazard Warning Flashers(page 135).
V
Electronic Locking Differential(ELD) button. See ElectronicLocking Differential (page 102).
W
Hill descent control. See TerrainResponse (page 109).
X
17
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
At a Glance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 20/266
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
WARNINGS
Use an approved child seat to securechildren less than 59 inches (150centimeters) tall in the rear seat.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child seat on a seatprotected by an air bag in front of it!
Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are installing
a child seat.
Do not modify child seats in any way.
Do not hold a child on your lap whenyour vehicle is moving.
Do not leave unattended children inyour vehicle.
WARNINGS
If your vehicle has been involved in acrash, have the child seats checked
by an authorized dealer.
Note: Mandatory use of child seats variesfrom country to country.
Only child seats certified to ECE-R44.03(or later) have been tested and approvedfor use in your vehicle. A choice of theseare available from an authorized dealer.
Child Seats for Different MassGroups
Use the correct child seat as follows:
Baby Safety Seat
Secure children that weigh less than 29pounds (13 kilograms) in a rearward facingbaby safety seat (Group 0+) on the rearseat.
18
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Child Safety
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 21/266
Child Safety Seat
Secure children that weigh between 29and 40 pounds (13 and 18 kilograms) in achild safety seat (Group 1) on the rear seat.
Booster Seats
WARNINGS
Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with only the lap
strap of the safety belt.
Do not install a booster seat or abooster cushion with a safety beltthat is slack or twisted.
Do not put the safety belt under yourchild’s arm or behind their back.
Do not use pillows, books or towelsto boost your child’s height.
Make sure that your children sit in an
upright position.
Note: When using a child seat on a rear seat, make sure that the child seat reststightly against the vehicle seat. It may be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See Head Restraints (page 76).
Booster Seat (Group 2)
Secure children that weigh more than 33pounds (15 kilograms) but are less than 59inches (150 centimeters) tall in a boosterseat or a booster cushion.
We recommend that you use a boosterseat that combines a cushion with abackrest instead of a booster cushion only.The raised seating position will allow you
to position the shoulder strap of the adultsafety belt over the center of your child’sshoulder and the lap strap tightly acrosstheir hips.
Booster Cushion (Group 3)
19
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Child Safety
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 22/266
ISOFIX Anchor Points
WARNING
Use an anti-rotation device whenusing the ISOFIX system. Werecommend the use of a top tether
or support leg.
Note: When you are purchasing an ISOFIX seat, make sure that you know the correct mass group and ISOFIX size class for theintended seating locations. See Child Seat
Positioning (page 21).
Your vehicle has ISOFIX anchor points that
accommodate universally approvedISOFIX child seats.
The ISOFIX system comprises two rigidattachment arms on the child seat thatattach to anchor points on the outboardrear seats, where the cushion and backrestmeet. Tether anchor points are located inthe back panel trim for child seats with atop tether.
Top Tether Anchor Points
Attaching a Child Seat with TopTethers
WARNINGS
Do not attach a tether strap toanything other than the correcttether anchor point.
Make sure that the top tether strapis not slack or twisted and is properlylocated on the anchor point.
make sure
Note: You may need to raise or remove the head restraint to ease installation. See Head Restraints (page 76).
1. Place the child seat on the back seatcushion and fold the relevant seatbackforward. See Rear Seats (page 76).
2. Route the tether strap under the headrestraint to the anchor point.
3. Push the seatback to the uprightposition.
4. Push the child seat back firmly toengage the ISOFIX lower anchor points.
5. Tighten the tether strap in line with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.
20
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Child Safety
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 23/266
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
See an authorized dealer for thelatest details relating to ourrecommended child seats.
Extreme Hazard! Do not use arearward facing child seat on a seatprotected by an air bag in front of it!
WARNINGS
When using a child seat with asupport leg, the support leg must
rest securely on the floor.When using a child seat with a safetybelt, make sure that the safety beltis not slack or twisted.
The child seat must rest tightlyagainst the vehicle seat. It may benecessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Head Restraints (page 76).
Mass group categories
Seating positions 3210+0
46 - 79 lbs(22 - 36 kg)
33 - 55 lbs(15 - 25 kg)
20 - 40 lbs(9 - 18 kg)
Up to 29lbs (13 kg)
Up to 22lbs (10 kg)
UF¹UF¹UF¹XXFront passenger seatwith airbag ON
U¹U¹U¹U¹U¹Front passenger seatwith airbag OFF
UUUUURear seats
XXXXXSingle cab center seat
X Not suitable for children in this mass group.
U Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group.
U¹ Suitable for universal category child seats approved for use in this mass group. However,we recommend that you secure children in a government approved child seat, on the rearseat.
UF¹ Suitable for universal category forward facing child seats approved for use in thismass group. However, we recommend that you secure children in a government approved
child seat, on the rear seat.Note: When using a child seat on a front seat, always adjust the front passenger's seat to its fully rearward position. If it provesdifficult to tighten the lap section of the safety belt without slack remaining, adjustthe seatback to the fully upright position and raise the height of the seat. See Seats(page 72).
21
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Child Safety
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 24/266
ISOFIX Child Seats
Mass group categories
Seating positions10+
Forward facingRear facing
20 - 40 lbs (9 - 18 kg)Up to 29 lbs (13 kg)
Not ISOFIX equippedSize classFront seat
Seat type
A, B, B1, C, D1
C, D, E1Size classRear outboard seat ISOFIX
IL, IUF3IL2Seat type
Not ISOFIX equippedSize classRear center seat
Seat type
IL Suitable for particular ISOFIX child seat systems of the semi-universal category. Pleaseconsult child seat systems suppliers' vehicle recommendation lists.
IUF Suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child seat systems of universal category approvedfor use in this mass group and ISOFIX size class.1The ISOFIX size class for both universal and semi-universal child seat systems is defined
by the capital letters A to G. These identification letters are displayed on ISOFIX childseat.2At time of publishing the recommended Group O+ ISOFIX baby safety seat is the Britax
Romer Baby Safe. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to ourrecommended child seats.3At time of publishing the recommended Group 1 ISOFIX child seat is the Britax Romer
Duo. See an authorized dealer for the latest details relating to our recommended childseats.
22
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Child Safety
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 25/266
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING
You cannot open the doors frominside if you have put the child safetylocks on.
Left-hand side
Turn counterclockwise to lock andclockwise to unlock.
Right-hand side
Turn clockwise to lock andcounterclockwise to unlock.
23
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Child Safety
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 26/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Wear a seat belt and keep sufficientdistance between yourself and thesteering wheel. Only when you use
the seat belt properly, can it hold you in aposition to achieve its optimum effect.
Never use a seat belt for more thanone person.
Use the correct buckle for each seatbelt.
Do not use a seat belt that is slackor twisted.
Do not wear thick clothing. The seatbelt must fit tightly around your bodyto achieve its optimum effect.
Position the shoulder strap of theseat belt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
The driver and front passenger seat beltretractors are fitted with a seat beltpretensioner. Seat belt pretensioners havea lower deployment threshold than the airbags. During minor collisions, it is possiblethat only the seat belt pretensioners willdeploy.
Status After a Collision
WARNING
If your vehicle has been involved inan accident, have the seat belts andanchorages checked by properly
trained technicians.
FASTENING THE SAFETYBELTS
WARNINGSInsert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear a distinct click. You havenot fastened the safety belt correctly
if you do not hear a click.
Make sure that your safety belt issecurely stored away and is notoutside your vehicle when closing the
door.
24
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Safety Belts
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 27/266
Pull the belt out steadily. It may lock if youpull it sharply or if your vehicle is on a slope.
The rear outer safety belts can lock if youreturn the seatback from a folded positionto the upright position forcefully. Shouldthe safety belt lock, recline the seat usingthe recline adjustment. See Rear Seats(page 76).
Press the red button on the buckle torelease the belt. Hold the tongue and let itretract completely and smoothly to itsstowed position.
Using Safety Belts DuringPregnancy
WARNING
Position the safety belt correctly foryour safety and that of your unborn
child. Do not use only the lap strapor the shoulder strap.
Pregnant women should always wear theirsafety belt. The lap belt portion of acombination lap and shoulder belt shouldbe positioned low across the hips belowthe belly and worn as tight as comfort willallow. The shoulder belt should bepositioned to cross the middle of theshoulder and the center of the chest.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt heightadjuster so that the safety belt restsacross the middle of your shoulder.
Failure to adjust the safety belt correctlycould reduce its effectiveness and increasethe risk of injury in a crash.
25
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Safety Belts
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 28/266
To adjust the shoulder belt height, pull thebutton and slide the height adjuster up ordown.
SAFETY BELT MINDER
WARNING
The system will only provideprotection when you use the safetybelt correctly.
Type 1: The warning lamp illuminates for6 seconds when you switch the ignition on
to remind the driver to fasten the safetybelt.
Type 2: The warning lamp continues toilluminate when the driver’s safety belt isnot fastened.
Type 3: The warning lamp illuminates anda tone sounds when the followingconditions have been met:
• The front safety belts have not beenfastened.
• Your vehicle exceeds a relatively lowspeed.
It will also illuminate when a front safetybelt is unfastened in an occupied seat andyour vehicle is moving.
If you do not fasten your safety belt, theaudible warning will turn off automaticallyafter approximately five minutes. Thewarning lamp continues to illuminate untilyou fasten the safety belt.
Switching the Safety Belt MinderOff
See an authorized dealer.
26
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Safety Belts
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 29/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Extreme Hazard! Never use arearward facing child restraint on aseat protected by an active airbag in
front of it. Death or serious injury to thechild can occur.
Do not modify the front of yourvehicle in any way. This couldadversely affect deployment of the
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warningcould result in serious personal injury ordeath.
Wear a safety belt and keepsufficient distance between yourselfand the steering wheel. Only when
you use the safety belt correctly, can it holdyou in a position that allows the airbag toachieve its optimum effect. See Sittingin the Correct Position (page 72). Failureto adhere to this warning could result inserious personal injury or death.
Repairs to the steering wheel,
steering column, seats, airbags andsafety belts must be carried out byan authorized dealer. Failure to adhere tothis warning could result in seriouspersonal injury or death.
Keep the areas in front of the airbagsfree from obstruction. Do not affixanything to or over the airbag covers.
In the event of a crash, hard objects couldcause serious personal injury or death.
Do not puncture the seat with sharpobjects. This could damage andadversely affect deployment of the
airbags. Failure to adhere to this warningcould result in serious personal injury ordeath.
Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer. Failure to
adhere to this warning could result inserious personal injury or death.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see acloud of harmless powdery residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
Note: Only wipe airbag covers with a dampcloth.
DRIVER AIRBAG
The airbag will deploy during significantfrontal collisions or collisions that are upto 30 degrees from the left or the right. The
airbag will inflate within a few thousandthsof a second and deflate on contact withthe occupant, thus cushioning forwardbody movement. During minor frontalcollisions, overturns, rear collisions andside collisions, the airbag will not deploy.
27
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Supplementary Restraints System
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 30/266
PASSENGER AIRBAG
The airbag will deploy during significantfrontal crashes or crashes that are up to30 degrees from the left or the right. Theairbag will inflate within a few thousandthsof a second and deflate on contact withthe occupant, thus cushioning forwardbody movement. During minor frontalcrashes, overturns, rear crashes and sidecrashes, the airbag will not deploy.
Fitting the Passenger AirbagDeactivation Switch
WARNING
If you need to fit a child restraint ona seat protected by an operationalairbag in front of it, have a passenger
airbag deactivation switch fitted. Have thisfitted by an authorized dealer.
If the airbag warning lamp illuminates or
flashes when you are driving, this indicatesa malfunction. Remove the child restraintand have the system checked immediately.
Switching the Passenger AirbagOff
WARNING
You must switch the airbag off whenusing a rearward facing child seat onthe front seat.
Switch offA
Switch onB
Turn the switch to position A.
When you switch the ignition on,check that the airbag
deactivation warning lampilluminates.
Note: The key switch is located in the glovecompartment with the airbag deactivationwarning lamp in the instrument panel.
28
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Supplementary Restraints System
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 31/266
Switching the Passenger AirbagOn
WARNING
You must switch the airbag on whenyou are not using a child seat on thefront seat.
Turn the switch to position B.
When you switch the ignition on,check that the airbag activationwarning lamp illuminates.
Note: The key switch is located in the glove
compartment with the airbag deactivationwarning lamp in the instrument panel.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING
Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer.
The airbags are located inside theseatback of the front seats. There is a labelattached to the side of the seatback toindicate this.
The airbag will deploy during significantlateral collisions. The airbag will not deployin minor lateral and frontal collisions, rearcollisions, or overturns.
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG
WARNING
Do not attempt to open the airbagcover.
The airbag will deploy during frontalcollisions or collisions that are up to 30degrees from the left or the right. Theairbag will inflate within a few thousandthsof a second and deflate on contact withthe occupants, thus providing a cushionbetween the driver’s knees and the steeringcolumn. During overturns, rear collisionsand side collisions, the knee airbag will notdeploy.
For item location: See Instrument PanelOverview (page 15).
Note: The airbag has a lower deploymentthreshold than the front airbags. During a minor collision, it is possible that only the knee airbag will deploy.
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS
The airbags are located over the front andrear side windows.
29
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Supplementary Restraints System
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 32/266
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 33/266
GENERAL INFORMATION ONRADIO FREQUENCIES
Note: Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party responsiblefor compliance could void the user ’ s authority to operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for yourtransmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
A decrease in operating range could becaused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to yourvehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remotecontrol can also be used by other shortdistance radio transmissions (e.g. amateurradios, medical equipment, wirelessheadphones, remote controls and alarmsystems). If the frequencies are jammed,you will not be able to use your remote
control. You can lock and unlock the doorswith the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote controlwill operate if you press any buttonunintentionally.
REMOTE CONTROL
You can program a maximum of eightremote controls to your vehicle. Thisincludes any that were supplied with yourvehicle. The remote controls must remaininside your vehicle during the programmingprocedure. Fasten the front safety beltsand close all doors to make sure thatconflicting chimes do not sound duringprogramming.
Programming a New RemoteControl
1. Turn the ignition key from position 0 to
position II four times within six seconds.2. Turn the ignition to position 0. A tone
sounds to indicate that it is nowpossible to program a remote control.
3. Press any button on a new remotecontrol within 10 seconds. A tone willsound as confirmation.
4. Repeat step three within 10 secondsfor each new remote control. Do notremove the key from the ignition when
pressing the button on the remotecontrol.
5. Switch the ignition back on (positionII) or wait for 10 seconds withoutprogramming another remote controlto end the key programming. Only theremote controls which you have justprogrammed are now able to lock andunlock your vehicle.
Reprogramming the Unlocking
FunctionNote: When you press the unlock buttoneither all the doors are unlocked or only thedriver ’ s door and the liftgate are unlocked.Pressing the unlock button again unlocks all the doors.
Press and hold the unlock and lock buttonson the remote control simultaneously forat least four seconds with the ignition off.The direction indicators will flash twice to
confirm the change.To return to the original unlocking function,repeat the process.
Programming the additional key
Note: You will need to have two programmed keys for this procedure.
1. Insert the first key and turn the ignitionon.
31
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Keys and Remote Controls
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 34/266
2. Remove the key within 10 seconds.
3. Insert the second key within 10 secondsand turn the ignition on.
4. Remove the key within 10 seconds.5. Insert the additional key within 10
seconds which need to beprogrammed.
Changing the Remote ControlBattery
Make sure that you dispose ofold batteries in anenvironmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authorityregarding recycling.
Remote Control With a Folding Key Blade
1. Insert a screwdriver as far as possibleinto the slot on the side of the remotecontrol, gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
3. Carefully remove the cover.
4. Turn the remote control over to removethe battery.
Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the screwdriver.
5. Install a new battery (3V CR 2032) withthe + facing upwards.
6. Replace the battery cover.
32
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Keys and Remote Controls
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 35/266
REPLACING A LOST KEY ORREMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls canbe purchased from an authorized dealer.Authorized dealers can program remotecontrols for your vehicle. See PassiveAnti-Theft System (page 34).
To re-program the passive anti-theftsystem see an authorized dealer.
33
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Keys and Remote Controls
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 36/266
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFTSYSTEM
Principle of OperationThe system prevents someone fromstarting the engine with an incorrectlycoded key.
Coded Keys
If you lose a key, you can obtain areplacement from an authorized dealer. Ifpossible, provide them with the keynumber from the tag provided with the
original keys. You can also obtain extrakeys from an authorized dealer.
Note: Have all of your remaining keyserased and recoded if you lose a key. Have replacement keys coded together with recoding your remaining keys. See an authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not shield your keys with metalobjects. This may prevent the receiver from recognizing a coded key.
Arming the Engine Immobilizer
When you switch the ignition off the engineimmobilizer will arm automatically after ashort time.
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer
When you switch the ignition on the engineimmobilizer will disarm automatically if acorrectly coded key is used.
If you are unable to start the engine with acorrectly coded key, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
Alarm System
Your vehicle may have one of the followingalarm systems:
• Perimeter alarm with interior sensors.
• Perimeter alarm with interior sensorsand battery back-up sounder.
Perimeter Alarm
The perimeter alarm is a deterrent againstunauthorized access to your vehiclethrough the doors and the hood.
Interior Sensors
WARNINGS
Do not cover up the interior lamp unitsensors.
Do not arm the alarm with full guardif passengers, animals or othermoving objects are inside your
vehicle.
Do not leave the rear seat cushionfolded up in the double cab when theinterior sensors are armed.
Do not leave the glasses holder open.
The sensors act as a deterrent againstunauthorized intrusion by sensing anymovement within your vehicle.
Arming the alarm will activate the interiorsensors.
Note: To permanently deactivate theinterior motion sensor, see an authorized dealer.
34
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Security
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 37/266
Note: Fuel fired heater may trigger false alarms. If you are using the fuel fired heater,direct the air flow towards the foot well.
Battery Back-up Sounder
The battery back-up sounder is anadditional alarm system that will sound asiren when the alarm is triggered. Whenyou lock your vehicle the system is armed.The sounder has its own battery and willsound an alarm siren even if someonedisconnects your vehicle battery or thebattery back-up sounder itself.
Triggering the Alarm
Once armed, the alarm is triggered in anyof the following ways:
• If someone opens a door or the hoodwithout a valid key or remote control.
• If someone removes the multi-functiondisplay.
• If you switch the ignition on without avalid key.
• If the interior sensors detect movement
within your vehicle.• On vehicles with a battery back-up
sounder, if someone disconnects yourvehicle battery or the battery back-upsounder itself.
If the alarm is triggered, the alarm horn willsound for 30 seconds and the hazardwarning flasher will flash for five minutes.
Any further attempts to perform one of theabove will trigger the alarm again.
Full and Reduced Guard
Full Guard
Full guard is the standard setting.
In full guard, the interior sensors are onwhen you arm the alarm.
Note: This may result in false alarms if animals or moving objects are inside your vehicle.
Reduced Guard
Note: To switch this feature on or off, see an authorized dealer.
In reduced guard, the interior sensors areoff when you arm the alarm.
Note: Reduced guard is available only onvehicles with remote central locking.
Note: You can set the alarm to reduced guard for the current ignition cycle only. The
alarm will reset to full guard the next time you unlock and then relock the vehicle withthe remote control.
Selecting Full or Reduced Guard
To activate reduced guard, lock the doorswith the key.
To deactivate reduced guard, unlock thedoors with the key or remote control.
To activate full guard, lock the doors with
the remote control.Note: You can set the alarm to reduced guard for the current ignition cycle only. The alarm will reset to full guard the next time you unlock and then relock the vehicle withthe remote control.
Arming the Alarm
To arm the alarm, lock your vehicle. SeeLocks (page 36).
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm and silence the alarm by unlockingthe doors with the key and switching theignition on with a correctly coded keywithin 12 seconds or unlocking the doorswith the remote control.
35
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Security
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 38/266
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
Note: Do not leave your keys in the vehicle.
Note: All the doors will lock automatically when the vehicle is driven at or above 7 Km/h (4.3 mph). This function can beenabled or disabled, see driver configuration mode later in this procedure.
Locking and unlocking the doorswith the key
UnlockA
LockB
Note: To double lock the doors, turn the key to the lock position twice within three seconds.
Locking and unlocking the doorswith the remote control
Automatic relocking: The doors will
relock automatically if you do not open adoor within 45 seconds of unlocking thedoors with the remote control. The doorlocks and the alarm will return to theirprevious state.
Key fold/unfold buttonA
UnlockB
LockC
Press the button B once to unlock thevehicle.
Press the button C once to activate centrallocking.
Note:Central locking is activated only when
all the passenger doors are closed.
Press the button C twice within fourseconds to double lock the doors.
Note: Double locking is activated only when all the passenger doors are closed and the hood is closed in the vehicle fitted with alarm.
36
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Locks
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 39/266
WARNING
Do not activate double locking whenpersons or animals are inside the
vehicle. You will not be able tounlock the doors from inside if you havedouble locked them.
Note: If the ignition is switched on with thedouble locking function activated, the lockwill automatically return to single lock stage.
Double locking is a theft protection featurethat prevents someone from opening thedoors from the inside.
Note: The driver ’ s door can be unlocked
with the key. This needs to be used if the remote control is not functioning.
Note: If the vehicle remains locked for several weeks, the remote control will bedisabled. The vehicle must be unlocked and the engine started using the key. Unlocking and starting the vehicle once will enable the remote control.
Reprogramming the unlocking function
The unlocking function may bereprogrammed so that only the driver’sdoor is unlocked. See Remote Control(page 31).
Locking and unlocking confirmation
Note: When you lock the doors, thedirection indicators will flash once.
When you double lock the doors, thedirection indicators will flash twice.
When you unlock the doors the directionindicators will flash one long flash.
Child play protection function
If the remote control buttons are pressedcontinuously several times, the locking andunlocking function will be blocked for awhile to avoid door latches fromoverheating.
Locking and unlocking the doorsfrom inside
Press the button. For item
location. See Instrument PanelOverview (page 15).
UnlockA
OpenB
Driver configuration mode
Note: This operation has to be done within 30 seconds .
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Press door lock button three times.
3. Switch the ignition OFF.
4. Press door lock button three times.
5. Switch the ignition ON.
The system will chirp to indicate that thedriver configuration mode is enabled.
Once in driver configuration mode, followthe steps mentioned below to toggle thestatus of the automatic locking by speedor automatic unlocking.
37
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Locks
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 40/266
Automatic locking by speed
Press the central lock or unlock buttontwice within three seconds and wait for
three seconds to toggle the automaticlocking by speed function. The system willchirp when toggling.
Automatic unlocking
Note: Automatic unlock is default enabled.
Press the central lock or unlock buttonthree time within three seconds and waitfor three seconds to toggle the automaticunlocking function.
If the automatic unlocking function isenabled:
• All doors will be unlocked whileopening the driver door or frontpassenger door (vehicles not deliveredwith remote control) from inside, withthe key in ignition.
If the automatic unlocking function isdisabled:
• Only the respective door will be
unlocked while opening from inside.
Note: Opening the rear doors will never unlock the other doors, when opened frominside.
Locking the doors individually withthe key
Note: If the central locking function fails tooperate, the doors can be individually locked using the key in the position shown.
Left-hand side
Turn clockwise to lock.
Right-hand side
Turn counterclockwise to lock.
Unlocking
Note: If the child safety locks have also been activated, pulling the internal lever willonly deactivate the emergency locking and not the child safety lock. The doors can only be opened using the external door handle.
Note: If the doors have been unlocked, they have to be locked individually using this method until the central locking function has been repaired.
Unlock the driver's door using the key. Theother doors can be unlocked individually by pulling the interior door handles on thosedoors.
38
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Locks
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 41/266
ADJUSTING THE STEERINGWHEEL
WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheelwhen your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in thecorrect position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 72).
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.
3. Lock the steering column.
AUDIO CONTROL
Select the required source on the audiounit.
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
Type 1
Volume upA
Seek up, next or end callB
39
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Steering Wheel
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 42/266
Volume downC
Seek down, previous or acceptcall
D
Type 2
Volume upA
Seek up or nextB
Volume downC
Seek down or previousD
ModeE
Press M to select the audio source.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previousstored preset.
• play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up ordown the frequency band.
• seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Push the control to switch on or off thevoice control.
CRUISE CONTROL
See Cruise Control (page 116).
40
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Steering Wheel
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 43/266
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
CAUTION
Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.
Single wipeA
Intermittent wipe or autowipersB
Normal wipeC
High speed wipeD
Intermittent wipe
Long wipe intervalA
Intermittent wipeB
Short wipe intervalC
AUTOWIPERS
CAUTIONS
Do not switch autowipers on in dryweather conditions. The rain sensoris very sensitive and the wipers may
operate if dirt, mist or insects hit thewindshield.
Replace the wiper blades as soon asthey begin to leave bands of waterand smears. If you do not replace
them, the rain sensor will continue todetect water on the windshield and thewipers will operate, even though the
majority of the windshield is dry.
Fully defrost the windshield in icyconditions before you switchautowipers on.
Switch autowipers off before youenter a car wash.
High sensitivityAOnB
Low sensitivityC
If you switch autowipers on, the wipers willnot cycle until water is detected on thewindshield. The rain sensor will thencontinuously measure the amount of wateron the windshield and adjust the speed ofthe wipers automatically.
41
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wipers and Washers
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 44/266
Adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorusing the rotary control. With lowsensitivity, the wipers will operate whenthe sensor detects a lot of water on the
windshield. With high sensitivity, the wiperswill operate if the sensor detects a smallamount of water on the windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
CAUTION
Operating this function with theengine off will drain the battery.
WARNING
Do not operate the windshieldwashers for more than 10 secondsor when the reservoir is empty.
42
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wipers and Washers
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 45/266
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents toaccommodate normal changes in airpressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-productof this design. When moist air enters thelamp assembly through the vents, there isa possibility that condensation can occurwhen the temperature is cold. Whennormal condensation occurs, a fine mistcan form on the interior of the lens. Thefine mist eventually clears and exitsthrough the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hoursunder dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of thelens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large dropletspresent on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,have your vehicle checked by an authorizeddealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
OffA
Auto-light controlB
HeadlampsC
Parking lamps, instrument panellamps, license plate lamps andtail lamps
D
Parking Lamps
WARNING
Prolonged use of the parking lampswhen the ignition is off will cause thebattery to run out of charge.
Select position D on the lighting control toswitch the parking lamps on. The parkinglamps operate with the ignition on or off.
Move the lever up or down to switch the
right or left hand side parking lamp.Note: Switch on the parking lamp within 10 minutes from the key out, reinsert the key if exceeded.
43
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Lighting
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 46/266
High Beams
Pull the lever toward you to switchbetween high beam and low beam.
Headlamp Flasher
Pull the lever toward you slightly andrelease it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
In severe weather conditions, it maybe necessary to switch yourheadlamps on manually.
Note: If you have switched autolamps on, you can only switch the high beam on when autolamps has switched the headlamps on.
The headlamps will come on and go offautomatically depending on the ambientlight.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTINGDIMMER
Press it repeatedly or press it and hold ituntil the desired level is reached.
Note: If you disconnect the battery or itloses charge the instrument lighting will
return to its brightest setting.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
Switch the ignition off and pull thedirection indicator lever toward you toswitch the headlamps on. A short tone willsound. They will automatically turn offafter three minutes or 30 seconds after thelast door is closed.
Opening any door within 30 seconds afterclosing all the doors will result in threeminute timer starting again.
Switch the ignition on or pull the directionindicator lever towards you again to switchthe headlamp exit delay off.
44
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Lighting
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 47/266
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Always remember to switch yourheadlamps on in low light situationsor during inclement weather. The
system does not activate the tail lampsand may not provide adequate lightingduring these conditions. Failure to activateyour headlamps under these conditionsmay result in a collision.
To switch the system on:1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Switch the lighting control to the off orautolamp position.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
Control lever
WARNING
Only use the front fog lamps whenvisibility is considerably restricted byfog, snow or rain.
Note: You cannot switch the front foglamps on unless you have switched the headlamps on.
Adjustment
You can adjust the front fog lamp aimingslightly for driving comfort.
Note: Fog lamp adjustment must meet thelocal regulation requirements.
1. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat,level surface.
2. Seat one person in the driver’s seat.
3. Start the engine so that the batteryremains charged.
4. Turn the front fog lamp on.
5. Adjust the fog lamp aiming such thatthe cut off line is not more than X: 20m (65.6 ft).
45
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Lighting
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 48/266
REAR FOG LAMPS WARNINGS
Only use the rear fog lamps whenvisibility is restricted to less than 50
meters (164 feet).Do not use the rear fog lamps whenit is raining or snowing and visibilityis more than 50 meters (164 feet).
Note: You cannot switch the rear fog lampson unless you have switched the headlamps and front fog lamp on.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
Without headlamp levelingA
With headlamp levelingB
You can adjust the level of the headlampbeams according to the vehicle load.
46
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Lighting
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 49/266
Raised headlamp beamsA
Lowered headlamp beamsB
Set the headlamp leveling control to zerowhen your vehicle is unloaded. Set it toprovide illumination between 35 and 100meters (114 and 328 feet) when yourvehicle is partially or fully loaded.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
APPROACH LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The side repeaters, number plate lamp and
the puddle lamps will come on and staysilluminated for 25 seconds when thevehicle is unlocked with the remote control.
If you open a door the light will stay onuntil:
• The door is closed
• Ignition is turned on
• 10 minutes
INTERIOR LAMPSCourtesy lamp
OffA
Door contactB
OnC
If you set the switch to position B, thecourtesy lamp will come on when youunlock or open a door. If you leave a dooropen with the ignition switch off, thecourtesy lamp will go off automaticallyafter some time to prevent the vehiclebattery from discharging. To switch it backon, switch on the ignition for a short time.
The courtesy lamp will also come on whenyou switch off the ignition. It will go offautomatically after a short time or whenyou start or restart the engine.
47
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Lighting
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 50/266
If you set the switch to position C with theignition switch off, the courtesy lamp willcome on. It will go off automatically aftera short time to prevent the vehicle battery
from discharging. To switch it back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.
Reading lamps
If you switch off the ignition, the readinglamps will go off automatically after sometime to prevent the vehicle battery fromdischarging. To switch them back on,switch on the ignition for a short time.
48
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Lighting
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 51/266
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended inyour vehicle and do not let them playwith the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,you should verify they are free ofobstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximityof the window openings.
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when just one of the windows is open. Lower theopposite window slightly to reduce this noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
Note: Window operation may stop or delay during low battery conditions and engine starting.
Note: If you repeatedly open and close thewindow several times within one minute,the system may disable to protect the motors from overheating.
Note: If you operate both the switch on the relevant door and the switch for thatwindow on the driver ’ s door at the sametime, the window will stop moving.
One-Touch Down (If Equipped)
Press the switch fully and release it. Pressagain or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up (If Equipped)
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press orlift it again to stop the window.
Window Lock
Press the control to lock or unlock the rearwindow controls.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It will reverse some distance ifthere is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-backfeature the window will not reverseif it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoidpersonal injury or damage to your vehicle.
49
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Windows and Mirrors
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 52/266
Proceed as follows to override thisprotection feature when there is aresistance, for example in winter:
1. Close the window twice until it reachesthe point of resistance and let itreverse.
2. Close the window a third time to thepoint of resistance. The bounce-backfeature is now disabled and you canclose the window manually. Thewindow will go past the point ofresistance and you can close it fully.
See an authorized dealer as soon aspossible if the window does not close after
the third attempt.
Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
The bounce-back feature remainsturned off until you reset thememory.
In an event of a flat battery or if you havedisconnected the battery, you must resetthe bounce-back memory separately foreach window.
1. Open the window.
2. Lift and hold the switch to secondaction point until the window is fullyclosed.
3. Hold the switch lifted for one moresecond and release.
4. Open the window using the first action
point and try to close it automaticallyusing second action point.
5. If the window does not open or closeautomatically when the switch ispressed or lifted to second actionpoints, repeat the procedure.
Safety Mode
WARNING
Bounce-back feature is not active insafety mode.
If the system detects a malfunction, itenters a safety mode. The windows willmove for only about 0.5 seconds at a timeand then stop. Close the windows bypulling the switch again when the windowsstop moving. Have this checkedimmediately.
Accessory Delay (If Equipped)
You can use the window switches forseveral minutes after you have switchedthe ignition off or until either front door isopened.
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when yourvehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to yourpreference. Some mirrors also have asecond pivot point. This lets you move themirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward youto reduce glare at night.
50
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Windows and Mirrors
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 53/266
Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduceglare when bright lights are detected frombehind your vehicle. It will automaticallyreturn to normal reflection when you selectreverse gear to make sure you have a clearview when backing up.
EXTERIOR MIRRORSPower Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when yourvehicle is moving. This could resultin the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Left-hand mirrorA
OffB
Right-hand mirrorC
Press the controller in the direction of the
arrows to adjust the mirror.The power exterior mirrors are fitted witha heating element that will defrost ordemist the mirror glass. See HeatedWindows and Mirrors (page 70).
Manual Folding and Unfolding
The power folding mirrors operate with theignition on, and for several minutes afteryou switch the ignition off.
Note: They will no longer operate if you switch the ignition off and open a door.
Press the button to fold or unfold themirrors.
Press the button again to stop and reversethe direction of movement.
51
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Windows and Mirrors
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 54/266
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door windowglass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to itsoriginal position.
SLIDING WINDOWS
52
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Windows and Mirrors
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 55/266
GAUGES
TachometerA
Fuel gaugeB
Engine coolant temperaturegauge
C
SpeedometerD
Illumination dimming buttonE
Information displayF
Trip computer display select andreset button
G
Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutionsper minute. Driving with your tachometerpointer continuously at the top of the scalemay damage the engine.
Fuel Gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge willindicate approximately how much fuel isleft in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge mayvary slightly when your vehicle is movingor on a gradient. The arrow adjacent to thefuel pump symbol indicates on which sideof the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge
WARNING
Never remove the coolant reservoircap while the engine is running or hot.
At normal operating temperature, theneedle will remain in the center section.
Note: Do not restart the engine until thecause of overheating has been resolved.
If the needle enters the red section, theengine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine thecause once the engine has cooled down.See Trip Computer (page 61).
Information Display
• Odometer/Tripodometer/Instantaneous FuelConsumption
• Outside Air Temperature (if equipped)
• Trip Computer See Trip Computer
(page 61).• Average Fuel Consumption
• Distance to Empty
WARNING LAMPS ANDINDICATORS
The following warning lamps andindicators as applicable will come onbriefly when you switch the ignition on to
confirm that the system is operational:• ABS warning lamp
• Vehicle immobilizer indicator
• Brake system warning lamp
• Ignition warning lamp
• Airbag warning lamp
• Low fuel level warning lamp
• Stability control (ESP) indicator
53
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Instrument Cluster
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 56/266
• Oil pressure warning lamp
• Oil Change Reminder Indicator (Dieselonly)
•Engine warning lamps
• Four-wheel drive indicator
• Four-wheel drive low (4L) indicator
• Electronic locking differential (ELD)indicator
• Water-in-fuel indicator (Diesel only)
• Washer fluid level indicator
• DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)
• Ice/Frost warning indicator
ABS warning lamp
If it illuminates when you aredriving, this indicates amalfunction. You will continue
to have normal braking (without ABS).Have the system checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as possible.
Vehicle immobilizer indicator
The immobilizer indicator willblink if the key is removed fromthe ignition or a wrong key is
inserted.
Brake system warning lamp
It illuminates when the parkingbrake is engaged.
WARNING
Reduce your speed gradually andstop your vehicle as soon as it is safeto do so. Use your brakes with care.
If it illuminates when you are driving, checkthat the parking brake is not engaged. Ifthe parking brake is not engaged, thisindicates a malfunction. Have the system
checked by a properly trained technicianimmediately.
Ignition warning lamp
If it illuminates when driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Switchoff all unnecessary electrical
equipment. Have your vehicle checked byan authorised dealer immediately.
Airbag warning lampIf it illuminates while driving, thisindicates a malfunction. Havethis checked as soon as possible.
Low fuel level warning lamp
If the low fuel level warning lampcomes on, refuel as soon aspossible.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pumpsymbol tells you on which side of yourvehicle the fuel filler cap is located.
Stability control (ESP) indicator
While driving, it flashes duringactivation of the system. Afterswitching on the ignition, if it
does not illuminate or illuminatescontinuously while driving, this indicates amalfunction. During a malfunction, thesystem switches off. Have the systemchecked by a properly trained technicianas soon as possible.
If you switch ESP off, thewarning lamp will flash twiceand remain illuminated. The
lamp will go out when you switch thesystem back on or when you switch theignition off.
54
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Instrument Cluster
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 57/266
Oil pressure warning lamp
CAUTION
Do not resume your journey if the oilpressure warning lamp comes ondespite the oil level being correct.
Have this checked immediately.
If the oil pressure warning lampcomes on when you are driving,this indicates a malfunction.
Stop, and switch the engine off and checkthe engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 158).
Oil Change Reminder Indicator(Diesel only)
The oil change reminderindicator informs that the enginerequires an engine oil change due
to excessive build up of soot within theengine oil.
Engine warning lamps
Malfunction indicator lamp
Powertrain warning lamp
All vehicles
If either lamp illuminates when the engineis running, this indicates a fault. The enginewill continue to run but it may have limitedpower. If it flashes when you are driving,reduce the speed of your vehicleimmediately. If it continues to flash, avoidheavy acceleration or deceleration. Havethe system checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately.
WARNING
Have this checked immediately.
If both lamps illuminate together, stop yourvehicle as soon as it is safe to do so(continued use may cause reduced powerand cause the engine to stop). Turn theignition off and attempt to restart theengine. If the engine restarts have thesystem checked by a properly trainedtechnician immediately. If the engine doesnot restart the vehicle must be checkedbefore continuing your journey.
Four-wheel drive indicator
The four-wheel drive indicatorlamp will come on when thetransfer shift switch is in the 4H
or 4L position. This will flash whileengaging to 4H or 4L. See UsingFour-Wheel Drive (page 97).
Four-wheel drive low (4L)
indicatorThe four-wheel drive low (4L)indicator lamp will come onwhen the transfer shift switch is
in 4L position. It will flash while engagingto 4L position. See Using Four-WheelDrive (page 97).
Electronic locking differential(ELD) indicator
The ELD indicator lamp willcome on when the reardifferential is locked. The lamp
will flash if an error has been detected orif the engage or disengage request cannotbe completed. See Using Four-WheelDrive (page 97).
55
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Instrument Cluster
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 58/266
Water-in-fuel indicator (Dieselonly)
The water-in-fuel indicator lamp
will come on if there is excesswater in the fuel filter. Drain off
the water immediately. See Draining theFuel Filter Water Trap (page 160).
Washer fluid level indicator
It illuminates when thewindshield washer fluid levelgoes below the minimum mark.
See Washer Fluid Check (page 161).
DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)
If this illuminates, have thesystem checked by a properlytrained technician as soon as
possible.
Ice/Frost warning indicator
WARNING
Even if the temperature rises toabove +4°C (39°F) there is noguarantee that the road is free of
hazards caused by inclement weather.
It will illuminate and glow orangewhen the outside airtemperature is between 4°C and
0°C (39°F and 32°F). It will glow red whenthe temperature is below 0°C (32°F).
Door open warning lamp
The door open warning lamp willcome on when you switch theignition on and if you have not
closed the doors properly.
Glow plug indicator - For Diesel vehicles
See Starting a Diesel Engine
(page 84).
Direction indicators
Right side turn indicator
Left side turn indicator
The direction indicator will flash when youuse the direction indicators. A suddenincrease in the rate of flashing warns of afailed bulb.
Headlamp indicator
The headlamp indicator will
come on when you switch theside and tail lamps on.
High beam indicator
The high beam indicator willcome on when you switch theheadlamp high beam on. It will
flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Front fog lamp indicator
The front fog lamp indicator willcome on when you switch thefront fog lamps on.
Rear fog lamp indicator
The rear fog lamp indicator lampwill come on when you switchthe rear fog lamps on.
56
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Instrument Cluster
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 59/266
Safety belt indicator
See Safety Belt Minder (page26).
Gear shift indicator lamp (Manualonly)
It will illuminate to inform youthat shifting to a higher gear maygive better fuel economy and
lower CO2 emissions.
Cruise control
It will illuminate when you haveset a speed using the cruisecontrol system.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS ANDINDICATORS
Door open warning
The door open warning chime will sound
if the vehicle speed exceeds approximately10 km/h (6.2 mph) and you have notclosed the doors.
Lights on warning
The lights on warning chime will sound ifyou the key is not in position II or III andopen any door before switching off thelights.
Not in park warning
The not in park warning chime will soundif the automatic transmission lever is notin park position and you open the driverdoor.
Parking brake warning
The parking brake warning chime willsound if the parking brake is left engaged
and the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Restraints back-up warning
The restraints back-up warning chime willsound if there is a malfunction in therestraints warning lamp. 5 sets of 5 tonebursts will be heard every 30 minutes.
Low fuel level warning
Low fuel level warning chime will soundwhen the low fuel level warning lamp isactivated and/or the information displayis showing 80, 40, 20, 0 km (50, 25, 10, 0miles) remaining.
Direction indicator
The direction indicator chime will soundwhen the left or right direction indicator isactivated.
Direction indicators warningThe direction indicator warning chime willsound if the left or right direction indicatoris left on and driven for more thanapproximately 3.2 km (1.98 miles).
One side park light
One side park light chime will sound whenthe one side park light is activated.
Home safeHome safe warning chime will sound whenthe home safe lighting is activated.
Safety belt minder
The safety belt warning chime will soundif the driver or passenger safety belt isunbuckled and the vehicle speed exceedsapproximately 25 km/h (15.5 mph).
57
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Instrument Cluster
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 60/266
Alarm warning
The alarm warning chime will sound if thevehicle is unlocked with the mechanical
key and not the remote key. The chime willsound for up to 12 seconds until the unlockbutton is pressed on the remote key or acorrectly coded key is inserted into theignition and turned to position II or III. If 12second elapses before this occurs, thevehicle alarm will sound.
Key in ignition warning
The key in ignition warning chime willsound if the key is inserted into the ignition
(but not turned to position II or III) and thedriver door is opened.
Over speed warning
Over speed warning chime will sound if thevehicle speed exceeds approximately 120km/h (74.5 mph) indicated.
Low washer fluid warning
Low washer fluid warning chime will sound
if the washer fluid level in the washerbottle is low.
Missed lock warning
Missed lock warning chime will sound ifthe door is not locked after pressing thelock button.
Note: This feature is default off. To activateit, contact your Ford dealer.
58
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Instrument Cluster
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 61/266
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result inloss of vehicle control, crash andinjury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using anydevice that may take your focus off theroad. Your primary responsibility is the safeoperation of your vehicle. We recommendagainst the use of any hand-held devicewhile driving and encourage the use ofvoice-operated systems when possible.Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use ofelectronic devices while driving.
Note: The information display will remainon for several minutes after you switch theignition off.
Gear display (Automatictransmission)
A
Trip computer displayB
Odometer displayC
Device List
There are various icons placed around thedisplay screen which light up when a
function is active (for example CD, Radioor Aux).
Information Display Controls
Various systems on your vehicle can becontrolled using the information displaycontrols on your audio unit. Correspondinginformation is displayed in the information
display.To use the controls:
• Press the up or down arrow button toscroll through and highlight the optionswithin a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter asubmenu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit asubmenu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menudisplay.
• Press the OK button to choose andconfirm settings or messages.
Menu Structure - InformationDisplay
You can access the menu using theinformation display control.
59
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Information Displays
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 62/266
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the items areoptional.
Menu
Route optionsNavigation
Map display
Assistance options
Personal data
Reset all settings
Adaptive volumeAudio settings
Sound
NAV audio mixing
DSP settings
DSP equalizer
Traffic
News
Alt. frequency
RDS Regional
Bluetooth
Auto time (GPS)Clock settings
Set time
Set date
Set time zone
Summer time
24-hour mode
60
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Information Displays
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 63/266
CLOCK
For detailed instructions on how to adjustthe clock See
Setting the clock on theaudio unit (page 214).
TRIP COMPUTER
Controls
For item location: See Gauges (page 53)..
Press the SET/RESET button less than 2seconds to:
•Select between the trip computerdisplays
Press and hold the SET/RESET buttonfor more than two seconds to:
• Reset trip A
• Reset trip B
• Reset average fuel consumption
• Reset average speed
The trip computer display includes thefollowing information displays:
Tripmeter (A and B)
61
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Information Displays
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 64/266
Registers the mileage of individualjourneys.
Distance to empty
Indicates the approximate distance thevehicle will travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank. Changes in driving pattern maycause the value to vary.
Average fuel consumption
Indicates the average fuel consumptionsince the function was last reset.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicates the current average fuelconsumption.
62
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Information Displays
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 65/266
Average speed
Indicates the average speed calculated
since the function was last reset.
Outside air temperature
Shows the outside air temperature.
Note: The position of the trip computer display may vary depending on theinformation shown in the display.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Language setting
Language set menu activeA
Language title displayB
A choice of eleven languages are availablefrom 01 to 11 in the order shown below:
01: English - GB
02: Swedish - S
03: German - D
04: Dutch - NL
05: French - F
06: Italian - I
07: Spanish - E
08: Portuguese - P
09: Turkish - TR
10: Russian - RUS
11: Polish - PLTo enter the language set menu:
1. With ignition off, press and hold thelight dimming button. For item location:See Gauges (page 53). and switchignition to on.
2. The display will show the language setmenu active.
63
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Information Displays
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 66/266
3. Press the SET/RESET to selectbetween the different languages.
4. Press and hold the SET/RESET
button to set the currently displayedlanguage.
5. A chime will be heard to confirm theselection.
6. The display will then return to normaloperation.
Units of measure
To select metric or imperial units foroutside temperature display:
1. Change display mode to "OutsideTemperature."
2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton for more than two seconds andthe units will change.
Toggling the units of measure using thisdisplay will affect the following displays:
• Outside air temperature.
• The temperature display in theautomatic climate control.
• The set temperature in themulti-function display.
64
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Information Displays
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 67/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Outside Air
Keep the air intakes in front of thewindshield free from obstruction (such assnow or leaves) to allow the climatecontrol system to function effectively.
Recirculated Air
WARNING
Prolonged use of recirculated air maycause the windows to mist up. If thewindows mist up, follow the settings
for demisting the windshield.
The air currently in the passengercompartment recirculates. Outside air doesnot enter your vehicle.
Heating
Heating performance depends on thetemperature of the engine coolant.
Air ConditioningNote: The air conditioning operates only when the temperature is above 39°F (4°C).
Note: When you use air conditioning, your vehicle uses more fuel.
The system directs air through theevaporator for cooling. The evaporatorextracts humidity from the air to help keepthe windows free of mist. The systemdirects the resulting condensation to the
outside of your vehicle, which may causea small pool to form under your vehicle.This is normal.
General Information on Controllingthe Interior Climate
Fully close all the windows.
Warming the Interior
Direct the air toward your feet. In cold orhumid weather conditions, direct some of
the air toward the windshield and the doorwindows.
Cooling the Interior
Direct the air toward your face.
AIR VENTS
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
Air distribution control
Face levelA
Face level and footwellB
65
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Climate Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 68/266
FootwellC
Footwell and windshieldD
WindshieldEYou can set the air distribution control toany of the indicated positions. A smallamount of air is directed towards thewindshield in positions B and C.
Blower
OffA
Temperature control
ColdBlue
WarmRed
Maximum coolingA/CMAX
Recirculated air
Press the recirculated air button to togglebetween outside air and recirculated air.
System settings
Note: Set all controls to the positions shown.
Heating the interior quickly
Select the outside air.
66
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Climate Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 69/266
Ventilation
Face level and footwellA
Face levelB
Set the air distribution control to positionA or position B. Set the blower andtemperature to any position and select theoutside air. Open the air vents to suitindividual requirements.
Switching the air conditioning on andoff
Press the A/C button to switch the airconditioning on and off.
Cooling with outside air
Switch the air conditioning on and selectthe outside air.
Cooling the interior quickly
Selecting the A/C MAX will providemaximum occupant cooling. To switch theA/C MAX off deselect the A/C or
recirculated air.
Defrosting and demisting thewindshield quickly
Selecting air to windshield willautomatically switch the A/C on and selectthe outside air.
Reducing interior air humidity
67
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Climate Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 70/266
Selecting air to windshield willautomatically switch the A/C on and selectthe outside air.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATECONTROL
The system controls the temperature,amount and distribution of the air flowautomatically and adjusts them accordingto the driving and weather conditions. Ashort press of the AUTO button onceswitches on the auto mode.
Note: When in AUTO, ensure that thetemperature is set to the desired level 22°C (71°F) is preferred).
Note: If the climate control is operated,information relating to this system isdisplayed in the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 59).
Note: Avoid adjusting the settings whenthe vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold.The automatic climate control adjusts tothe current circumstances automatically.
For the system to function properly, the side and center vents should be fully open.
Note: The sunload sensor is located on topof the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor with any objects.
Note: The in car temperature sensor islocated behind the grill below the air distribution control. Do not cover the grillwith any objects.
Note: At low outside temperatures, when
the system is in auto mode, the air flow will be low and the air stream will be directed to the windshield and the side windows aslong as the engine is cold.
Air distribution control
WindshieldA
Face levelB
FootwellC
To adjust air distribution, press the desiredbutton. The combination of settings thatcan be selected are
A,
B,
C,
A and C and
B and C.
Blower
68
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Climate Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 71/266
Note: When the blower is in AUTO mode, no blower setting indicators will beilluminated.
When the blower speed is controlledmanually by operationg the blower dial,the blower setting is indicated in thedisplay above the air distribution controls.
To return to auto mode, short press theAUTO button.
Temperature control
You can set the temperature between 16°C(61°F) and 28°C (82°F) in steps of 0.5°C(1°F). In position LO (below 16°C (61°F))the system will switch to permanentcooling, in HI (above 28°C (82°F)) topermanent heating, and not regulate astable temperature.
Mono ModeIn Mono mode the temperature settingsfor both the driver’s and passenger’s sideare linked. If you adjust the temperatureusing the rotary control on the driver’s side,the settings will be adjusted to the samesetting on the passenger’s side.
To switch dual mode on
Long press of the AUTO button orselecting the temperature for the
passenger’s side with the rotary control on
the passenger’s side. The temperature forthe driver’s side will remain unchanged.You can now adjust the driver andpassenger side temperaturesindependently. The temperature settingsfor each side are shown in the display. Youcan set a temperature difference of up to4°C (8°F).
Note: If you set a temperature differenceof greater than 4°C (8°F), the temperature
on the other side will be adjusted so thatthe difference remains 4°C (8°F).
To switch dual mode off
Press the AUTO button for three secondsor select HI or LO on the driver's side. Thepassenger’s side temperature will beadjusted to the driver’s side temperature.
Recirculated air
Press the recirculated air button to togglebetween fresh air and recirculated air.
Note: When the system is in auto mode and the interior and exterior temperatures arequite hot, the system selects recirculated air automatically to maximize cooling of theinterior. Once the selected temperature is reached, the system will reselect outside air automatically.
Cooling the interior quickly
69
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Climate Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 72/266
Selecting the A/C MAX will providemaximum occupant cooling. A secondpress of the A/C MAX button will switchthe A/C MAX off.
Windshield defrosting anddemisting
Press the MAX defrost button for quickdemisting of the windshield.
Fresh air will flow into the vehicle and A/Cis automatically selected. The blowerspeed, temperature control and fresh airoperate automatically and cannot beadjusted in this mode. The blower is set tomaximum speed and the temperature toHI.
When you select MAX defrost, the heatedwindows switch on automatically andswitch off after a preset time.
A second press of the MAX defrost button
will return the system to the previoussettings.
To return to auto mode, short press theAUTO button.
Switching the air conditioning onand off
Press the A/C button to switch the airconditioning on and off. The light in thebutton indicates the status of the A/C.
Note: The A/C operates only when theengine is running.
Switching off the automaticclimate control
Press the power button to switch thesystem on and off. When switched off,recirculated air is selected but it is alsopossible to manually select the fresh air.
HEATED WINDOWS ANDMIRRORS
Note: Make sure the engine is running before operating the heated windows.
Heated Windshield
Press the button to clear the window ofthin ice and fog.
Heated Rear Window
Press the button to clear the window ofthin ice and fog. Press the button againwithin 10 minutes to switch it off. Itswitches off automatically after 10minutes, or when you switch the ignition
off.Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the insideof the rear window. This may cause damageto the heated grid lines and will not becovered by your warranty.
70
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Climate Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 73/266
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrorswith a scraper or attempt to readjust the
mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mistand fog when the heated rear window isswitched on.
71
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Climate Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 74/266
SITTING IN THE CORRECTPOSITION
WARNINGSDo not recline the seatback too faras this can cause the occupant toslide under the safety belt, resulting
in serious injury in the event of a collision.
Sitting improperly, out of position orwith the seatback reclined too far,can result in serious injury or death
in the event of a collision. Always situpright against your seatback, with yourfeet on the floor.
Do not place objects higher than theseatback to reduce the risk of seriousinjury in the event of a collision or
during heavy braking.
When you use them properly, the seat,head restraint, safety belt and air bags will
provide optimum protection in the eventof a collision.
We recommend that you follow theseguidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the baseof your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of it is level with the top of yourhead and as far forward as possible.Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance betweenyourself and the steering wheel. Werecommend a minimum of 10 inches(25 centimeters) between yourbreastbone and the air bag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your armsslightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you canpress the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of thesafety belt over the center of yourshoulder and position the lap straptightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position iscomfortable and that you can maintain fullcontrol of your vehicle.
MANUAL SEATS
WARNINGSUse seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer.
Do not adjust the driver seat whenyour vehicle is moving.
Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as part of a special equipment pack arewashable without removing them from the
seats.
Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted to work with the seat's existing features and safety systems, and should not require adjustment. If seat cover removal and installation is required, see an authorized Ford dealer.
72
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Seats
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 75/266
Moving the Seat Backward andForward
WARNINGS
Make sure the driver seat fully locksinto place by rocking it backward and
forward.Do not move the front seats tooclose to the instrument panel.
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
Adjusting the Height of the
Driver's Seat
73
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Seats
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 76/266
Recline Adjustment
Folding the Seatback - Stretch cab
Folding the front passenger seat allowseasy access to the rear seat.
Bench seat
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Use seat covers designed for seatswith side airbags. Have these fittedby an authorized dealer.
Do not adjust the driver seat whenyour vehicle is moving.
Do not place cargo or any objectsbehind the seatback before returningit to the original position.
Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as
part of a special equipment pack arewashable without removing them from the seats.
Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted to work with the seat's existing features and safety systems, and should not require adjustment. If seat cover removal and installation is required, see an authorized Ford dealer.
74
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Seats
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 77/266
Moving the Seat Backward andForward
WARNING
Do not move the front seats tooclose to the instrument panel.
Adjusting the Height of theDriver's Seat
Recline Adjustment
75
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Seats
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 78/266
Tilting the Seat
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Raise the rear head restraint whenthe rear seat is occupied by apassenger.
When front seats are in use the headrestraints must not be removed.
Adjusting the head restraints
Adjust the head restraint so that the topof it is level with the top of your head.
Removing the head restraints
Front head restraints
Press locking button 1 and at the sametime release the retaining clip 2 using asuitable implement.
Rear outer head restraints
Pull to move the head restraint upward.Press the locking button 1 to lower thehead restraint or to remove the head
restraint.
REAR SEATS
Note: Stow the rear seat belt tongue intothe pockets provided in the sides of the rear seat back to prevent rattling when not inuse.
76
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Seats
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 79/266
Note: Seat covers fitted to your vehicle as part of a special equipment pack arewashable without removing them from the seats.
Note: Seat covers are designed and fitted to work with the seat's existing features and safety systems, and should not require adjustment. If seat cover removal and installation is required, see an authorized Ford dealer.
Folding the Seat Cushion
Stretch cab
Double cab
Unfolding the Seat Cushion
Note: The cushion tether strap must be stowed in the pocket provided.
Folding the Seatback
Double cab
WARNINGS
When folding the seatbacks down,take care not to get your fingerscaught between the seatback and
seat frame.
Do not use the rear surface of the
rear seat back as a load floor.Do not de-latch and fold theseatback when the seat cushion isfolded up.
1. Pull the release strap upward.
2. Push the seatback forward.
77
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Seats
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 80/266
Unfolding the Seatback
Double cab
WARNINGSWhen folding the seatbacks up,make sure that the safety belts arevisible to an occupant and not
caught behind the seat.
Make sure that the seats and theseatbacks are secure and fullyengaged in their catches.
HEATED SEATS
WARNING
People who are unable to feel painto their skin because of advancedage, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal
cord injury, medication, alcohol use,exhaustion or other physical conditions,must exercise care when using the heatedseat. The heated seat may cause burnseven at low temperatures, especially ifused for long periods of time. Do not placeanything on the seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket or cushion. Thismay cause the heated seat to overheat.Do not puncture the seat with pins, needlesor other pointed objects. This may damagethe heating element which may cause theheated seat to overheat. An overheatedseat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
•Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or anyother liquid is spilled on the seat. Allowthe seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless theengine is running. Doing so could drainyour vehicle battery.
For item location: See Climate Control(page 65).
The heated seat will only operate with theignition switched on.
The maximum temperature is reached
after five or six minutes. It is regulatedthermostatically.
The heated seat will remain on until eitherthe heated seat switch or the ignition isswitched off.
Adjust the control to the desired heatsetting.
78
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Seats
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 81/266
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electricalaccessories into the cigar lightersocket. Incorrect use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by yourwarranty, and can result in fire or seriousinjury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 volt appliances with a maximum current ratingof 20 amps.
After you switch the ignition off the power supply will only work for a maximum of 30 minutes.Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power point. Thiswill damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over thevehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watt or a
fuse may blow.Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Incorrect use of the power point cancause damage not covered by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point capsclosed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of thepower point.
To prevent the battery from running out ofcharge:
• Do not use the power point longer thannecessary when the engine is notrunning.
• Do not leave devices plugged inovernight or when your vehicle isparked for extended periods.
Location
Power points may be found:
• on the center stack.
CIGAR LIGHTER
Note: Do not hold the cigar lighter element pressed in.
Note: If you use the socket when the engineis not running, the battery may lose charge.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, youcan use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current ratingof 20 amps.
Note: After you switch the ignition off the power supply will only work for a maximumof 30 minutes.
Note: Use only Ford accessory connectorsor connectors specified for use with SAE standard sockets.
Press the element in to use the cigar
lighter. It will pop out automatically.
79
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Auxiliary Power Points
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 82/266
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
Do not place hot drinks in the cupholders when your vehicle is moving.
GLOVE BOX
Driver Side
Passenger Side
CENTER CONSOLE
80
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Storage Compartments
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 83/266
COOL BOX
OpenA
CloseB
ASHTRAY
You can place the removable ashtray inany of the cup holders.
GLASSES HOLDER (IF EQUIPPED)
The glasses must be placed in the glassesholder with the lenses facing downwardas shown in the picture. If not, the glasses
can fall down when the glasses holder isopen.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
1. Push the armrest into the seatback andhold.
2. Pull the strap and open the armrest.
81
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Storage Compartments
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 84/266
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high enginespeeds can produce very hightemperatures in the engine and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire orother damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicleon dry grass or other dry groundcover. The emission system heats up
the engine compartment and exhaustsystem, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closedgarage or in other enclosed areas.Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start theengine.
If you smell exhaust fumes insideyour vehicle, have it checked by aFord Dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaustfumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehiclemay exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics for approximately 8kilometers after you reconnect it. This isbecause the engine management systemmust realign itself with the engine. You candisregard any unusual drivingcharacteristics during this period.
When you start the engine, avoid pressingthe accelerator pedal before and duringoperation. Only use the accelerator pedalwhen you have difficulty starting theengine.
IGNITION SWITCH
0(off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and leave your vehicle, do not leave your key inthe ignition. This could cause your vehicle battery to lose charge.
I (accessory) - Allows the electricalaccessories such as the radio to operatewhile the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this position for too long to avoid your vehicle battery losing charge.
II (on) - All electrical circuits operational.
Warning lamps and indicators areilluminated.
III (start) - cranks the engine. Release thekey as soon as the engine starts.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK
WARNING
Always check that the steering isunlocked before attempting to move
your vehicle.
Vehicles without Keyless Starting
To lock the steering wheel:
1. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.
2. Rotate the steering wheel slightly toengage the lock.
82
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Starting and Stopping the Engine
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 85/266
Unlocking the Steering Wheel
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission
Switch the ignition on or press the brakepedal.
Vehicles With Manual Transmission
Switch the ignition on or press the clutchpedal.
STARTING A GASOLINEENGINE
Note: You can only operate the starter 10 seconds. The number of start attempts islimited to approximately six. If you exceed this limit, the system does not allow you totry again for about 30 minutes.
Cold or Hot Engine
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while theengine is starting stops the engine cranking and returns the ignition to on.
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P or N.
3. Start the engine.
All Vehicles
If the engine does not start within 10seconds, wait for a short period and tryagain.
If the engine does not start after threeattempts, wait 10 seconds and follow theflooded engine procedure.
If you have difficulty starting the enginewhen the temperature is below -13°F(-25°C), press the accelerator pedal to themid-way point of its travel and try again.
Flooded Engine
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal andhold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Move the transmission selector leverto position P or N.
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal andhold it there.
4. Start the engine.
All Vehicles
If the engine does not start, repeat the coldor hot engine procedure.
Engine Idle Speed after Starting
The speed at which the engine idlesimmediately after starting minimizesvehicle emissions and maximizes cabincomfort and fuel economy.
The idle speed varies depending on certainfactors. These include vehicle componentand ambient temperatures as well aselectrical and climate system demands.
83
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Starting and Stopping the Engine
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 86/266
Failure to Start
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
If the engine does not crank when you fulldepress the clutch pedal with the ignitionkey in position III, follow this procedure:
1. Fully depress the clutch and brakepedals.
2. Turn the key to position III until theengine has started.
STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
Cold or Hot EngineAll Vehicles
Note: When the temperature is below 5°F (-15°C), you may need to crank the enginefor up to 10 seconds.
Note: You can only operate the starter for a limited period of time.
Note: After a limited number of attemptsto start your engine, the system will not
allow you to try again until a period of time has elapsed, for example 30 minutes.
Switch the ignition on and waituntil the glow plug indicator goesoff.
Vehicles With Manual Transmission
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: Releasing the clutch pedal while the
engine is starting will stop the enginecranking and return to ignition on.
1. Fully depress the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: Releasing the brake pedal while theengine is starting will stop the enginecranking and return to ignition on.
1. Move the transmission selector leverto position P or N.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal.
3. Start the engine.
Failure to Start
Vehicles With Manual Transmission
If the engine does not crank when theclutch pedal has been fully depressed andthe ignition key is turned to position III.
1. Fully depress the clutch and brakepedals.
2. Turn the key to position III until theengine has started.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
The filter forms part of the emissionsreduction system on your vehicle. It filters
harmful diesel particulates (soot) from theexhaust gas.
Regeneration
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The
regeneration process creates very highexhaust gas temperatures and the exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring and after regeneration and after youhave switched the engine off. This is apotential fire hazard.
Note: Avoid running out of fuel.
84
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Starting and Stopping the Engine
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 87/266
Note: During regeneration at low speed or engine idle, you may smell a hot metallicodor and could notice a clicking metallic sound. This is due to the high temperatures
reached during regeneration and is normal.
Note: Changes in the engine or exhaust sound may be heard during the regeneration process.
Note: After you have switched your engineoff the fans may continue to run for a short period of time.
The diesel particulate filter on your vehiclerequires periodic regeneration to maintainits correct function. Your vehicle will carryout this process automatically.
If your journeys meet one of the followingconditions:
• You drive only short distances.
• You frequently switch the ignition onand off.
• Your journeys contain a high level ofacceleration and deceleration.
You must carry out occasional trips with
the following conditions to assist theregeneration process:
• Drive your vehicle in more favorableconditions, which you will find at highervehicle speeds in normal driving, on amain road or freeway for a minimumof 20 minutes. This drive may includeshort stops that will not affect theregeneration process.
• Avoid prolonged idling and alwaysobserve speed limits and roadconditions.
• Do not switch the ignition off.
• Select a suitable gear to ideallymaintain engine speed between 1500and 3000 RPM.
SWITCHING OFF THE ENGINE
Vehicles With a Turbocharger
WARNING
Do not switch the engine off when itis running at high speed. If you do, theturbocharger will continue running
after the engine oil pressure has droppedto zero. This will lead to prematureturbocharger bearing wear.
Release the accelerator pedal. Wait untilthe engine has reached idle speed and then
switch it off.
85
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Starting and Stopping the Engine
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 88/266
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. Thepressure in an overfilled tank maycause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
The fuel system may be underpressure. If you hear a hissing soundnear the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel
capless fuel system), do not refuel untilthe sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may sprayout, which could cause serious personalinjury.
Automotive fuels can cause seriousinjury or death if misused ormishandled.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pumpnozzle can produce static electricity,which can cause a fire if fuel is
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline maycontain benzene, which is acancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut theengine off and never allow sparks oropen flames near the filler neck.
Never smoke or use a cell phone whilerefueling. Fuel vapor is extremelyhazardous under certain conditions. Avoidinhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines whenhandling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials andany open flames before refueling yourvehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle beforerefueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful orfatal if swallowed. Fuel such asgasoline is highly toxic and ifswallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,call a physician immediately, even if nosymptoms are immediately apparent.The toxic effects of fuel may not bevisible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling toomuch fuel vapor of any kind can leadto eye and respiratory tract irritation.In severe cases, excessive or prolongedbreathing of fuel vapor can causeserious illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. Iffuel is splashed in the eyes, removecontact lenses (if worn), flush withwater for 15 minutes and seek medicalattention. Failure to seek propermedical attention could lead topermanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbedthrough the skin. If fuel is splashed onthe skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing andwash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Repeated or prolonged skincontact with fuel liquid or vapor causesskin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiramfor the treatment of alcoholism.Breathing gasoline vapors, or skincontact could cause an adversereaction. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness may result.If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptlywash skin thoroughly with soap andwater. Consult a physician immediatelyif you experience an adverse reaction.
86
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuel and Refueling
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 89/266
FUEL QUALITY
WARNINGS
Do not mix gasoline with oil, dieselor other liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.
Do not use leaded gasoline orgasoline with additives containingother metallic compounds (e.g.
manganese-based). They could damagethe emission system.
Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel.
Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives or other enginetreatments for normal vehicle use.
Use minimum 91 octane unleaded gasolinethat meets the specification defined by EN228 or the equivalent nationalspecification.
Your vehicle is suitable for use with ethanolblends up to 20% (E20).
Long-Term Storage
Most gasoline contains ethanol. Werecommend that you fill the fuel tank withfuel that does not contain ethanol if youintend to store your vehicle for more thantwo months. Alternatively, we recommendthat you seek advice from an authorizeddealer.
FUEL QUALITYWARNINGS
Do not mix diesel with oil, gasolineor other liquids. This could cause achemical reaction.
Do not add kerosene, paraffin orgasoline to diesel. This could causedamage to the fuel system.
WARNINGS
Use diesel that meets thespecification defined by EN 590 or
the relevant national specification.
Note: We recommend that you use only high quality fuel.
Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives or other enginetreatments for normal vehicle use.
Note: We do not recommend the use of additional additives to prevent fuel waxing.
Long-Term StorageMost diesel fuels contain biodiesel. Werecommend that you fill the fuel tank withfuel that does not contain biodiesel if youintend to store your vehicle for more thantwo months. Alternatively, we recommendthat you seek advice from your dealer.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because thissituation may have an adverse effect onengine components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition fromoff to on several times after refuelingto allow the fuel system to pump thefuel from the tank to the engine. Onrestarting, cranking time will take a fewseconds longer than normal. Withkeyless ignition, just start the engine.
Crank time will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 3.8 liters of fuel isenough to restart the engine. If thevehicle is out of fuel and on a steepgrade, more than 3.8 liters may berequired.
87
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuel and Refueling
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 90/266
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING
Do not park or idle your vehicle overdry leaves, dry grass or othercombustible materials. The exhaust
will radiate a considerable amount of heatduring use, and after you have switchedthe engine off. This is a potential firehazard.
Driving with a Catalytic Converter
WARNINGS
Avoid running out of fuel.
Do not crank the engine for longperiods.
Do not run the engine when a sparkplug lead is disconnected.
Do not push-start or tow-start yourvehicle. Use booster cables. SeeJump Starting the Vehicle (page
136).Do not switch the ignition off whendriving.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to start the engine ifyou have filled the fuel tank with theincorrect fuel. This could damage the
engine. Have your vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer immediately.
Do not use any kind of flames or heatnear the fuel system. The fuel systemis under pressure. There is a risk of
injury if the fuel system is leaking.
WARNINGS
If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray the fuel
filler flap briefly from a distance notless than 8 inches (200 millimeters).
We recommend that you wait atleast 10 seconds before removing thefuel nozzle to allow any residual fuel
to drain into the fuel tank.
Stop refueling after the fuel nozzlestops the second time. Additionalfuel will fill the expansion space in
the fuel tank which could lead to fueloverflowing. Fuel spillage could be
hazardous to other road users.
Do not remove the fuel nozzle fromits fully inserted position during theentire refueling process.
Note: Central locking also locks and unlocks the fuel filler flap. See Locking and Unlocking (page 36).
Vehicles with Fuel Filler Cap
1. Press the flap to open it.
88
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuel and Refueling
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 91/266
2. Open the flap fully until it engages.
3. Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise.4. To close, turn the fuel filler cap
clockwise until it clicks.
5. Close and push the fuel filler flap tolock it.
Note: Disregard the hissing noise whileopening the filler cap. This is normal.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap,replace only with the cap designed for yourvehicle. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuelsystem if the correct genuine Ford fuel fillercap is not used.
Vehicles without Fuel Filler Cap
1. Press the flap to open it. Open the flapfully until it engages.
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel nozzle, a spring loaded inhibitor will open.This helps to avoid filling up with theincorrect fuel.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle up to andincluding the first notch on the fuelnozzle A. Keep it resting on the cover
of the fuel pipe opening.
3. Hold the fuel nozzle in position B duringrefueling. Holding the fuel nozzle inposition A can affect the flow of fueland shut off the fuel nozzle before thefuel tank is full.
89
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuel and Refueling
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 92/266
4. Slightly raise the fuel nozzle to removeit.
Note: A funnel is located in the glove box.Use this when refilling with a fuel can.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in theempty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gaugeindicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the fuel tank.
The CO2 and fuel consumption figures arederived from laboratory tests according toRegulation (EC) 715/2007 and subsequentamendments are carried out by all vehiclemanufacturers.
They are intended as a comparisonbetween makes and models of vehicles.They are not intended to represent the realworld fuel consumption you may get fromyour vehicle.
Real world fuel consumption is governed
by many factors including: driving style,high speed driving, stop-start driving, airconditioning usage, the accessories fitted,payload, towing, etc.
The advertised capacity is the indicatedcapacity and the empty reserve combined.Indicated capacity is the difference in theamount of fuel in the fuel tank and when
the fuel gauge indicates empty. Emptyreserve is the amount of fuel in the fueltank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Filling the Fuel Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Switch the ignition off.
• Allow no more than two automaticshut-offs when refueling.
Results are most accurate when therefueling method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during thefirst 1000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this isthe engine break-in period). A moreaccurate measurement is obtained after2500 mi (4,000 km). Also, fuel expense,frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readingsare not accurate ways to measure fuel
economy.1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, recordthe amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five fuel tank fillups, fill the fuel tank and record thecurrent odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer readingfrom the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividingmiles traveled by gallons used (ForMetric: Multiply liters used by 100, thendivide by kilometers traveled).
90
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuel and Refueling
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 93/266
Keep a record for at least one month andrecord the type of driving (city or freeway).This provides an accurate estimate of yourvehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter showhow temperature impacts fuel economy.In general, your vehicle will use more fuelin cold temperatures.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel Consumption Figures
CO2 Emis-sions
CombinedExtra-UrbanUrban
Variant
g/kml/100 km
(mpg)l/100 km
(mpg)l/100 km
(mpg)
24410.2 (27.7)8.2 (34.4)13.6 (20.7)Vehicles with a 2.5LDuratec-HE engine - 2-wheel drive
25910.8 (26.1)8.9 (31.7)14.1 (20.0)Vehicles with a 2.5LDuratec-HE engine - 4-wheel drive
2037.6 (37.2)6.8 (41.5)9.0 (31.4)
Vehicles with a 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 2-wheel drive (manual trans-mission - MT82)
2178.1 (34.9)7.1 (39.8)9.9 (28.5)
Vehicles with a 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 4-wheel drive (manual trans-mission - MT82)
2388.9 (31.7)7.6 (37.2)11.1 (25.4)
Vehicles with a 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 2-wheel drive (automatictransmission)
2519.4 (30.0)7.9 (35.7)12.1 (23.3)
Vehicles with a 2.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 4-wheel drive (automatictransmission)
2228.4 (33.6)7.0 (40.3)10.8 (26.1)
Vehicles with a 3.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 2-wheel drive (manual trans-mission - MT82)
91
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuel and Refueling
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 94/266
CO2 Emis-sions
CombinedExtra-UrbanUrban
Variant
g/km
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
l/100 km
(mpg)
2419.1 (31.0)7.6 (37.1)11.8 (23.9)
Vehicles with a 3.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 4-wheel drive (manual trans-mission - MT82)
2398.9 (31.7)7.4 (38.2)11.6 (24.3)
Vehicles with a 3.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 2-wheel drive (automatictransmission)
2519.4 (30.0)7.9 (35.7)12 (23.5)
Vehicles with a 3.2LDuratorq-TDCi engine - 4-wheel drive (automatictransmission)
92
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuel and Refueling
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 95/266
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
Selecting Reverse Gear
Do not engage reverse gear when yourvehicle is moving. This can cause damageto the transmission.
Raise the collar when you select reversegear.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fullyand make sure you move the
transmission selector lever to park.Switch the ignition off and remove the keywhenever you leave your vehicle.
Selector lever positions
ParkP
ReverseR
NeutralN
DriveD
Sport mode and manual shiftingS
Manual shift upS+
Manual shift downS-
WARNING
Apply the brakes before moving theselector lever and keep them applieduntil you are ready to move off.
Note: A cold engine has a higher idle speed.This will increase the tendency for your vehicle to creep when you have selected adrive gear.
Press the button on the transmissionselector lever to select reverse and park.
The transmission selector lever positionwill be shown in the instrument clusterdisplay.
93
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Transmission
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 96/266
P (Park)
WARNINGS
Move the transmission selector lever
to park only when your vehicle isstationary.
Apply the parking brake and movethe transmission selector lever topark before leaving your vehicle.
Make sure that the transmission selectorlever is latched in position.
Note: To move the selector lever from park position, apply the footbrake and ignition
key in position II.In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels and the transmissionis locked. You can start the engine with thetransmission selector lever in this position.
Note: An audible warning will sound if youopen the drivers door and you have not moved the transmission selector lever to park.
Note: The battery saver will deactivate the
audible warning after a period of time.
R (Reverse)
WARNINGS
Move the transmission selector leverto reverse only when your vehicle isstationary and the engine is at idle
speed.
Always come to a complete stopbefore shifting the transmission
selector lever out of reverse.
Move the transmission selector lever toreverse to allow your vehicle to movebackward.
N (Neutral)
In this position, power is not transmittedto the drive wheels but the transmission is
not locked. You can start the engine withthe transmission selector lever in thisposition.
D (Drive)
Note: A shift will occur only when your vehicle speed and the engine speed are appropriate.
Select drive to shift automatically throughthe forward gears.
The transmission will select theappropriate gear for optimum performancebased on ambient temperature, roadgradient, vehicle load and your input.
Sport Mode and Manual Shifting
Sport mode
Note: In sport mode the transmissionoperates as normal but gears are selected more quickly and at higher engine speeds.
Note: In sport mode S will be shown in theinstrument cluster display.
Note: When towing heavy loads or in hilly terrain, it is recommended that sport modeis selected. This will result in cooler transmission temperatures and additionalengine braking.
Switch on sport mode by moving thetransmission selector lever from driveposition towards the driver. Sport mode
will remain on until either you shiftmanually up or down the gears using +and -.
Manual shifting
WARNINGS
Do not hold the transmission selectorlever permanently in - or +.
94
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Transmission
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 97/266
WARNINGS
The transmission will automaticallydownshift when the engine speed is
too low.
Manual shifting can be done only when theselector lever is in position S. Move thetransmission selector lever forward todownshift and backward to upshift.
When the vehicle is stationary, only the 1stand 2nd gears can be selected.
Manual shifting is sequential, thereforegears cannot be skipped.
The transmission will remain in theselected gear. When the engine speed is
too low or idle, it will downshift to 2nd gear.The selected gear is indicated in theinstrument cluster. See GeneralInformation (page 59).
Manual mode also provides a kickdownfunction. See Kickdown.
Hints on driving with an automatictransmission
WARNING
Do not idle the engine for longperiods of time in drive with thebrakes applied.
Moving off
WARNING
It is not possible to tow-start orpush-start a vehicle fitted with anautomatic transmission. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 136).
1. Release the parking brake.
2. Release the brake pedal and press theaccelerator pedal.
Stopping
1. Release the accelerator pedal andpress the brake pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Move the transmission selector leverto N or P.
Kickdown
Press the accelerator pedal fully with thetransmission selector lever in the driveposition to select the next highest gear foroptimum performance. Release theaccelerator pedal when you no longerrequire kickdown.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud orSnow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engineis not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute or damage to thetransmission and tires may occur, or theengine may overheat.
95
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Transmission
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 98/266
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,it may be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency Park Position ReleaseLever
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until youverify that the brake lamps areworking.
If the parking brake is fully released,but the brake warning lamp remainsilluminated, the brakes may not be
working correctly. See an authorizeddealer.
Use the button to move the transmissionselector lever from the park position in theevent of an electrical malfunction or if yourvehicle battery has no charge.
1. Apply the parking brake and switch theignition off before performing thisprocedure.
2. Lift up the cover in the center consolenext to the transmission selector leverwith a suitable tool.
3. Push down the locking button in theslot and simultaneously move theselector lever out of the P position.
Note: Take care when opening the cover.Note: See an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used.
96
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Transmission
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 99/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
This system is a proactive system. It hasthe ability to anticipate wheel slip andtransfer torque to the rear wheels beforeslip occurs. Even when wheel slip is notpresent, the system is continuously makingadjustments to the torque distribution, inan attempt to improve straight line andcornering behavior, both on and off road.
The system automatically turns on everytime you switch the ignition on.
All components of the system are sealedand do not require maintenance.
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
Note: A clicking sound from the drive line may be heard while shifting between ranges,which is normal.
Two-Wheel Drive, High Range (2H)
Use for all normal road driving and also foroff-road driving across dry, level terrain.
Four-Wheel Drive, High Range(4H)
WARNING
Do not use four-wheel drive 4H fornormal road driving.
Use for off-road driving.
We recommend that you frequentlyinspect your vehicle's chassis componentsif your vehicle is subject to off-road use.
Note: The four-wheel drive indicator lampwill come on when the transfer shift switch
is in the 4H position. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 53).
Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range (4L)
WARNING
Do not use four-wheel drive 4H fornormal road driving.
Use for more extreme off-road conditions,such as steep ascents and descents.
Also use when low speed manoeuvring isnecessary, such as reversing a trailer ornegotiating a boulder-strewn river bed.
We recommend that you frequentlyinspect your vehicle's chassis componentsif your vehicle is subject to off-road use.
Note: The four-wheel drive low range 4L and four-wheel drive indicator lamps willcome on when the transfer shift switch is inthe 4L position. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 53).
Shifting Between 2H and 4H
Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the stability control (ESP) functions.
97
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Four-Wheel Drive
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 100/266
Shift between 2H and 4H can be done withthe vehicle moving up to 68.4 mph(110 km/h), but only with the acceleratorpedal released. During the shift the
indicator lamp will flash.
Shifting Between 2H and 4L
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate EngineTraction Control and Trailer Stability Control but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist and Brake Traction Control remain active.
Note: Shift to 2H will reactivate all the stability control (ESP) functions.
1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to doso.
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal (manualtransmission).
3. Move the transmission selector leverto position N (automatic transmission).
4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 2Hto 4L or 4L to 2H.
During the shift the indicator lamp willflash. If it continues to flash, check meeting
the above conditions.
Shifting Between 4H and 4L
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate EngineTraction Control and Trailer Stability Control but Hill Descent Control, Hill Start Assist and Brake Traction Control remain active.
1. Stop the vehicle when it is safe to doso.
2. Fully depress the clutch pedal (manual
transmission).3. Move the transmission selector lever
to position N (automatic transmission).
4. Turn the transfer shift switch from 4Hto 4L or 4L to 4H.
During the shift the indicator lamp willflash. If it continues to flash, check meetingthe above conditions.
Driving in Special Conditions WithFour-Wheel Drive
Four-wheel drive vehicles are suitable for
driving on sand, snow, mud and roughroads and have operating characteristicsthat are somewhat different fromconventional vehicles, both on and off thefreeway.
When driving at slow speeds off road underhigh load conditions, use a low gear whenpossible. Low gear operation will maximizethe engine and transmission coolingcapability.
Basic Operating Principles
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds whichcan affect the normal steeringcharacteristics of your vehicle.
• When driving your vehicle on surfacesmade slippery by loose sand, water,gravel, snow or ice proceed with care.
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
vehicle speed and avoid severe braking.When your vehicle speed has been reducedease your vehicle back onto the road. Donot turn the steering wheel sharply whilereturning your vehicle to the road.
It may be safer to stay on the shoulder ofthe road and slow down gradually beforereturning to the road. You may lose controlif you do not slow down or if you turn thesteering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It may be less risky to strike small objects,such as freeway reflectors, with minordamage to your vehicle rather thanattempt a sudden return to the road whichcould cause your vehicle to slide sidewaysout of control or roll over. Remember, yoursafety and the safety of others should beyour primary concern.
98
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Four-Wheel Drive
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 101/266
Emergency Maneuvers
In an unavoidable emergency situationwhere a sudden sharp turn must be made,
remember to avoid over-driving yourvehicle (i.e. turn the steering wheel only asrapidly and as far as required to avoid theemergency). Excessive steering can resultin loss of vehicle control. Apply smoothpressure to the accelerator pedal or brakepedal when changes in vehicle speed arerequired. Avoid abrupt steering,acceleration and braking. This could resultin an increased risk of vehicle roll over, lossof vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring yourvehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop, avoidskidding the tires and do not attempt anysharp steering wheel movements.
If your vehicle goes from one type ofsurface to another (i.e. from concrete togravel) there will be a change in the wayyour vehicle responds to a maneuver (i.e.steering, acceleration or braking).
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all fourwheels on the most solid area of the trail.Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shiftto a lower gear and drive steadily throughthe terrain. Apply the accelerator slowlyand avoid excessive wheel slip.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand foran extended period of time. This will causethe system to overheat.
To resume operation, switch the ignitionoff and allow the system to cool down fora minimum of 15 minutes.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sandunder high outside temperatures, use a lowgear when possible. Low gear operationwill maximize the engine and transmissioncooling capability.
Avoid driving at excessive speeds, thiscauses vehicle momentum to work againstyou and your vehicle could become stuckto the point that assistance may be
required from another vehicle. Remember,you may be able to back out the way youcame if you proceed with caution.
Mud and Water
Mud
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehiclespeed or direction when you are driving inmud. Even four-wheel drive vehicles canlose traction in slick mud. If your vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slideuntil you regain control of your vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residuestuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.Excess mud stuck on tires and rotatingdriveshafts can cause an imbalance thatcould damage drive components.
Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability maybe limited.
When driving through water, determine thedepth and avoid water higher than thebottom of the wheel rims. If the ignitionsystem gets wet, your vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes.Wet brakes do not stop your vehicle aseffectively as dry brakes. Drying can beimproved by applying light pressure to thebrake pedal while moving slowly.
Note: Driving through deep water may damage the transmission. If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axlelubricant and power transfer unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary.
99
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Four-Wheel Drive
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 102/266
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Although natural obstacles may make itnecessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should alwaystry to drive straight up or straight down.
Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and possible vehicle roll over.Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand the route you will use. Do notdrive over the crest of a hill without seeingwhat conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, startin a lower gear rather than downshifting toa lower gear from a higher gear once theascent has started. This reduces strain onthe engine and the possibility of stalling.
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turnaround because this could cause vehicleroll over. It is better to reverse back to asafe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will causethe tires to slip, spin or lose traction,resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you woulduse to climb up the hill to avoid excessivebrake application and brake overheating.Do not descend in neutral. Disengage
overdrive or move the transmissionselector lever to a lower gear. Whendescending a steep hill, avoid sudden hardbraking as you could lose control. The frontwheels have to be turning in order to steeryour vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, thereforeapply the brakes steadily. Do not pump thebrake pedal.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slipperyconditions that require tire chains orcables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow forlonger stopping distances and avoidaggressive steering to reduce the chancesof a loss of vehicle control which can leadto serious injury or death. If the rear end ofyour vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regaincontrol of your vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can causetransmission damage.
Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantagesover two-wheel drive vehicles in snow andice but can skid like any other vehicle.Should you start to slide while driving onsnowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regaincontrol.
Avoid sudden applications of power andquick changes of direction on snow andice. Apply the accelerator slowly andsteadily when starting from a full stop.
100
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Four-Wheel Drive
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 103/266
Avoid sudden braking. Although afour-wheel drive vehicle may acceleratebetter than a two-wheel drive vehicle insnow and ice, it will not stop any faster as
braking occurs at all four wheels. Do notbecome overconfident as to roadconditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distancebetween you and other vehicles forstopping. Drive slower than usual andconsider using one of the lower gears. Inemergency stopping situations, apply thebrake steadily. As your vehicle has a fourwheel anti-lock brake system, do not pumpthe brake pedal. See Hints on DrivingWith Anti-Lock Brakes (page 103).
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud orSnow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,it may be rocked out by shifting betweenforward and reverse gears, stoppingbetween shifts in a steady pattern. Presslightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature,damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for morethan a minute, damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems onyour vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performancewhether loaded or empty. For this reason,we strongly recommend that you do notmake modifications such as adding orremoving parts (i.e. lift kits or stabilizerbars) or by using replacement parts notequivalent to the original factoryequipment.
We recommend that you use caution whenyour vehicle has either a high load or device(i.e. ladder or luggage racks). Anymodifications to your vehicle that raise the
center of gravity may cause your vehicleto roll over when there is a loss of vehiclecontrol.
Failure to maintain your vehicle correctlymay void the warranty, increase your repaircost, reduce vehicle performance andoperational capabilities and adverselyaffect you and your passenger's safety. Werecommend you frequently inspect yourvehicle's chassis components when yourvehicle is subject to off road usage.
101
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Four-Wheel Drive
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 104/266
LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
This axle provides added traction onslippery surfaces, particularly when onewheel is on a poor traction surface. Undernormal conditions, the limited slip axlefunctions like a standard rear axle. The axlemay exhibit a slight noise or vibration intight turns with low vehicle speed. This isnormal behavior and indicates the axle isworking.
ELECTRONIC LOCKINGDIFFERENTIAL
WARNING
Do not operate the system on sealedroads. Doing so may lead toexcessive tire noise and wear. Use
the system only in consistently slippery orloose surface.
The system locks the left and right portionsof the rear axle together to form a solid
driving axle, resulting in increased rearwheel traction in certain conditions.
Press the Electronic Locking Differential(ELD) button to activate the system. Foritem location: See Instrument PanelOverview (page 15).
The rear axle will lock and unlock when theinternal gears are aligned and with notorque load on the differential. To aidalignment, drive the vehicle in a straight
line with the accelerator pedal released.Alternatively, drive slowly forward andbackward while moving the steering wheelfrom side to side to allow the internaldifferential gears to align.
The system will:
• Automatically disengage when a speedof 24.9 mph (40 km/h) is exceeded.
• Automatically re-engage when the
speed drops below 18.6 mph(30 km/h).
• Automatically disengage when theignition is turned off.
Note: The system activates when thevehicle speed is less than 18.6 mph(30 km/h) and accelerator pedal released.
Note: The system can be used in any transmission drive range (2H, 4H or 4L).
If the system is selected when driving
above 24.9 mph (40 km/h), the request isstored and will be engaged when thevehicle speed reduces to 18.6 mph(30 km/h). The ELD indicator lamp willflash until either the vehicle speed reducesand the differential lock is engaged or thedriver deselects the ELD button.
Note: When the system is engaged, theElectronic Stability Program (ESP) functions such as Stability Control, Traction Control,Hill Descent Control, Emergency stop signal,
Hill Start Assist and Trailer stability controlwill be deactivated, the ESP off indicator illuminates, and the HDC on indicator turnsoff.
Note: When the ABS is operating, the system will be disengaged.
102
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Rear Axle
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 105/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Disc brakes
Wet brake discs result in reduced brakingefficiency. Dab the brake pedal whendriving from a car wash to remove the filmof water.
ABS
WARNING
The ABS does not relieve you of yourresponsibility to drive with due careand attention.
The ABS helps you to maintain full steeringand directional stability when you brakeheavily in an emergency, by preventing theroad wheels from locking.
Brake override
In the event that the accelerator pedalbecomes stuck or entrapped, applyingsteady and firm pressure to the brake
pedal will both slow the vehicle and reduceengine power.
If you experience this condition:
1. Apply the brakes and bring your vehicleto a safe stop.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Select park (automatic transmissiononly).
4. Apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for anyinterferences. If none are found and thecondition persists, have your vehicle towedto a dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITHANTI-LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travelfurther. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise from the system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will noteliminate the risks when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle infront of you
• your vehicle is hydroplaning
• you take corners too fast• the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fullyand leave your vehicle with thetransmission selector lever in
position P.
Note: Do not press the release button while pulling the lever up.
To apply the parking brake:
1. Press the foot brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up to itsfullest extent.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing uphill, move the transmission selector
lever to position P and turn the steeringwheel away from the curb.
Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing downhill, move the transmission selector lever to P and turn the steeringwheel toward the curb.
To release the parking brake:
1. Press the brake pedal firmly.
2. Pull the lever up slightly.
103
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Brakes
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 106/266
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 107/266
• Apply the parking brake.
• Open any door.
• Drive off uphill without re-applying the
brake.• Wait for one to two seconds after you
remove your foot from the brake pedal.
• If the system is active in a forward gear,select reverse gear.
• If the system is active in neutral,release the clutch pedal (Manualtransmission).
• If the system is active in reverse gear,select neutral.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: You can only switch the system on and off if your vehicle has a manualtransmission.
Note: The system will remain on or off depending on how it was last set.
Your vehicle comes with this featurealready enabled. If required, you can switchthis feature off using the information
display. See General Information (page59).
105
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Brakes
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 108/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoiddrive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the systemapplies the brakes to individual wheelsand, when needed, reduces engine powerat the same time. If the wheels spin whenaccelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,the system reduces engine power in orderto increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
Traction control forms part of the stabilitycontrol system.
Note: The system automatically turns onevery time you switch the ignition on.
Note: Switching off the stability control willturn off the system.
In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow ormud), turning the system off may bebeneficial as this allows the wheels to spinwith full engine power.
Traction control is an enhanced feature ofstability control system and automaticallydetects the wheel spin when youaccelerate. If this situation occurs, thesystem applies your vehicle brakes atindividual wheels and if necessary, reducesengine power.
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate enginetraction control but brake traction control remain active.
Note: Switching on the electronic lockingdifferential will turn off the system.
Note: To switch off the traction control as required, See Stability Control (page 107).
106
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Traction Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 109/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Electronic Stability Program
WARNING
The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention. Failure to do so
could result in loss of vehicle control,personal injury or death.
Without ESPA
With ESPB
The system supports stability when yourvehicle starts to slide away from yourintended path. The system performs thisby braking individual wheels and reducingengine torque as required.
The system also provides an enhancedtraction control function by reducingengine torque if the wheels spin when youaccelerate. This improves your ability topull away on slippery roads or loosesurfaces, and improves comfort by limitingwheel spin in hairpin bends.
Stability Control Warning Lamp
While driving, it flashes when the systemis operating. See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 53).
USING STABILITY CONTROL
Note: The system will be switched on automatically every time you switch theignition on.
Note: When the system is deactivated withthe transfer switch in 2H position, the ESPoff indicator will flash twice to indicate that
the system is completely turned off and remains illuminated. Press the switch againto enable the system. For item location: See
At a Glance (page 12).
Note: ESP is switched off when the transfer switch is in 4L position or the electroniclocking differential is operating.
2-wheel drive vehicles
Press and hold the switch for one secondto deactivate engine traction control, trailerstability control and brake traction control.Hill start assist remains active.
4-wheel drive vehicles
Note: All the stability control (ESP)functions are reactivated when 2H positionis selected.
Transfer shift switch in 4H position:
• Press and hold the switch for one
second to deactivate engine tractioncontrol and trailer stability control. Hilldescent control, hill start assist andbrake traction control remain active.
Transfer shift switch in 4H or 4L position:
107
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Stability Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 110/266
• Press and hold the switch for fiveseconds to deactivate engine tractioncontrol, trailer stability control andbrake traction control. Hill descent
control and hill start assist remainactive.
Transfer shift switch in 2H position:
• Press and hold the switch for onesecond to deactivate engine tractioncontrol, brake traction control andstability control including trailerstability control. Hill descent controland hill start assist remain active.
108
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Stability Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 111/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
Before driving off-road it isabsolutely essential thatin-experienced drivers become fully
familiar with the vehicle's controls. Inparticular, Sport mode and Hill DescentControl (HDC).
Hill descent control (HDC) operates inconjunction with stability control (ESP) toprovide greater control when off-road,particularly when descending steep slopes.
HDC operation is fully automatic whenengaged.
Engine braking controls the speed of thedescent during an off-road hill descent. Ifengine braking alone is insufficient tocontrol the vehicle's speed, HDC will slowthe vehicle using the braking system.
Note: Use HDC only in first or reverse gear in manual transmission vehicles.
Note: Use HDC only in D , R or Sport mode1 in automatic transmission vehicles. Whenin D, the vehicle will select the most appropriate gear.
USING HILL DESCENTCONTROL
Note: HDC deactivates when the electroniclocking differential is operating.
Selecting HDCSelect HDC at speeds less than 37.3 mph(60 km/h). To select HDC, press the hilldescent control switch. For item location:See Instrument Panel Overview (page15).
Note: HDC will be active at speeds lessthan 21.7 mph (35 km/h) and deactivated above 24.9 mph (40 km/h) but will not turnoff until vehicle exceeds 37.3 mph
(60 km/h).
Note: HDC will turn off when you switchthe ignition off.
The HDC switch will illuminatecontinuously to indicate thatHDC is fully active.
HDC will temporarily deactivate during thefollowing conditions:
• The brake is hot. Operation resumes
once the brakes cool down.
• Stability control indicator on warninglamp is illuminated and operating.
• Electronic locking differential isoperating.
HDC Operation
Cruise control switches on the steering
wheel allows you to control your speed ofdescent. SET + increases the speed andSET - decreases the speed.
109
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Terrain Response
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 112/266
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Releasethe control when you reach the desired
speed.• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately0.6 mph (1 km/h) increments.
Pressing the accelerator pedal or brakepedal will increase or decrease the speedrespectively.
Note: Each gear has a pre-determined minimum speed.
Note: Descent speed will only increase on
a slope steep enough to provide additional momentum. Therefore, use of the SET+ switch on a gentle slope may not increasethe speed.
Note: Brake overrides the HDC if the brake pedal is pressed and the system resumeson the release of the brake pedal.
Note: HDC assistance will fade out gradually if you switch the system off. Thisis to prevent the loss of control if you press
the HDC switch unintentionally. If assistanceis still required, you can switch back the HDC on. The control will resume at a speed thevehicle is travelling when the pedal is released.
Note: You may hear a noise from the system. This is normal.
Note: When HDC is operating, ESP onwarning lamp will flash.
HDC operates only if the vehicle speed is
within the specified range even if thesystem is on permanently during off-roaddriving.
110
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Terrain Response
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 113/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
If your vehicles has a non-Fordapproved trailer tow module thesystem may not correctly detect
objects.
The sensors may not detect objectsin heavy rain or other conditions thatcause disruptive reflections.
The sensors may not detect objectswith surfaces that absorb ultrasonicwaves.
The system does not detect objectsthat are moving away from yourvehicle. They will only be detected
shortly after they start to move towardyour vehicle.
Take particular care when reversingwith a tow ball arm or a rear fitted
accessory. For example, a bicyclecarrier. The rear parking aid will onlyindicate the approximate distance fromthe rear bumper to an object.
If you use a high pressure spray towash your vehicle, only spray thesensors briefly from a distance not
less than eight inches (20 centimeters).
Note: If your vehicle has a tow ball arm, the system is turned off automatically when
trailer lamps (or lighting boards) areconnected to the 13-pin socket through aFord approved trailer tow module.
Note: Keep the sensors free from dirt, iceor snow. Do not clean with sharp objects.
Note: The system may emit false alerts if it detects a signal using the same frequency as the sensors or if your vehicle is fully loaded.
Note: The outer sensors may detect the side walls of a garage. If the distance between the outer sensors and the side wall remains constant for three seconds, the
alert will turn off. As you continue the inner sensors will detect objects directly behind your vehicle.
PARKING AID
WARNING
The parking aid does not relieve youof your responsibility to drive withdue care and attention.
The parking aid is automatically activatedwhen you select reverse gear with theignition switched on.
Note: It will chime once to indicate that the parking aid is activated.
Note: The indicator lamps will be displayed in the multi-function display. For itemlocation: See Instrument Panel Overview (page 15). .
111
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Parking Aids
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 114/266
You will hear an intermittent tone at adistance of approximately 180 centimeters(71 inches) between the obstacle and rearbumper and approximately 50 centimeters
(20 inches) to the side. Decreasing thedistance accelerates the intermittent tone.
Distance Indicator.A
As the distance decreases the indicatormoves towards the vehicle.
A continuous tone will start at a distanceof less than 40 centimeters (15 inches) tothe rear bumper.
Malfunction indicator.A
Note: If a malfunction is indicated the
system will be disabled and a unique tonewill be heard. Have the system checked by a properly trained technician.
112
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Parking Aids
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 115/266
A trailer symbol indicates there is a trailerattached and the system is disabled.
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
The operation of the camera mayvary depending on the ambienttemperature, vehicle and road
conditions.
The distances shown in the displaymay differ from the actual distance.
Do not place objects in front of thecamera.
The camera is located on the tailgatebelow the badge.
Switching the Rear View Camera
On
WARNING
The camera may not detect objectsthat are close to your vehicle.
Switch the ignition and the audio unit on.
Move the transmission selector lever toreverse.
The image is displayed on the rear viewmirror screen.
The camera may not operate correctly inthe following conditions:
• Dark areas.
• Intense light.
• If the ambient temperature increasesor decreases rapidly.
• If the camera is wet, for example in rainor high humidity.
• If the camera's view is obstructed, forexample by mud.
Using the Display
WARNINGS
Obstacles above the camera positionwill not be shown. Inspect the areabehind your vehicle if necessary.
113
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Parking Aids
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 116/266
WARNINGS
Marks are for general guidance only,and are calculated for vehicles in
maximum load conditions on aneven road surface.
The lines show the distance from the outeredge of the front tire plus two inches (51millimeters) and the rear bumper.
Exterior mirror clearance - 4inches (0.1 meter)
A
Red - up to 12 inches (0.3 meter)B
Amber - 39 inches (1 meter)C
114
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Parking Aids
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 117/266
Green - 79 inches (2 meter)D
Black - center line of theprojected vehicle path
E
Note: When reversing with a trailer, the lineson the screen are not shown. The camerawill show your vehicle direction and not thetrailer.
Switching the Rear View CameraOff
Note: Move the transmission selector lever from reverse gear. The display will switchoff after a short period.
Note: The system will automatically switchoff once your vehicle speed has reached approximately 9.3 mph (15 km/h).
115
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Parking Aids
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 118/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING
The system does not relieve you ofyour responsibility to drive with duecare and attention.
Cruise control allows you to control yourspeed using the switches on the steeringwheel. You can use cruise control whenyou exceed approximately 20 mph (30km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavytraffic, on winding roads or when theroad surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, seriousinjury or death.
When you are going downhill, yourspeed may increase above the setspeed. The system will not apply the
brakes. Change down a gear to assist thesystem in maintaining the set speed.Failure to do so could result in loss ofvehicle control, serious injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph(16 km/h) below your set speed whiledriving uphill.
The cruise controls are located on thesteering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
The indicator will display in theinstrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Releasethe control when you reach the desiredspeed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. Theset speed will change in approximately1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedaluntil you reach the desired speed. Pressand release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CAN, or tap the brakepedal. The set speed will not be erased.
116
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Cruise Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 119/266
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control OffNote: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch theignition off.
117
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Cruise Control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 120/266
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Use load securing straps to anapproved standard, e.g. DIN.
Make sure that you secure all looseitems properly.
Place luggage and other loads as lowand as far forward as possible withinthe luggage or loadspace.
Do not drive with the liftgate or reardoor open. Exhaust fumes may enteryour vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum frontand rear axle loads for your vehicle.See Vehicle Identification Plate
(page 190).
Do not exceed the maximum grossvehicle weight. See VehicleIdentification Plate (page 190).
Note: When loading long objects in to your vehicle, for example pipes, timber or furniture be careful not to damage theinterior trim.
LUGGAGE COVERS
WARNINGS
Do not move your vehicle withpeople or animals in the loadspace.
Do not use the roller shutter pull
strap to secure loads.Do not sit, stand or place anythingon the roller shutter.
WARNINGS
To service the roller shutter, see anauthorized dealer.
Note: You must secure the loads carried inthe loadspace.
Note: Use the pull strap to close the roller shutter.
Note: Make sure that the roller shutter isfree of any obstruction before you open or close it. For example; snow or ice.
Note: Water and dust may enter theloadspace with the roller shutter closed.
Operation
The roller shutter has four lockingpositions:
1. Fully closed.
2. 1/3 open.
3. 2/3 open.
4. Fully open.
Note:The locking mechanism does not lock
automatically as it passes each locking position.
Locking and lunlocking intopositions
Note: You will hear a click as the roller shutter passes each locking position.
Note: Use the pull strap to control the roller shutter movement while opening.
Lock the roller shutter at the requiredlocking position by pulling the pull strap tothe left.
118
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Load Carrying
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 121/266
Unlock the roller shutter by pulling the pullstrap to the right or by pressing the lockbuttons.
119
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Load Carrying
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 122/266
ROOF RACKS AND LOADCARRIERS
WARNINGS
If you use a roof rack, the fuelconsumption of your vehicle will behigher and you may experience
different driving characteristics.
Read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions when you are fitting a
roof rack.
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the maximumpermissible roof rail load of 176.37 lb(80 kg), including the roof rack.
Check the security of the roof rack load:
• Before starting.
• After driving 31.1 mi (50 km).
• At 621.4 mi (1,000 km) intervals.
120
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Load Carrying
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 123/266
Roof RailA
Sports barB
Box railC
Note:Do not sit or stand on items B or C.
Note: Do not use item C to secure loads.
Note: To reduce fuel consumption, roof rails should be removed when not in use.
LOAD RETAINING FIXTURES
Tie Down Points
WARNINGS
Use the tie down points only forrestraining the loads within theloadspace. Using tie down points for
any other purpose may lead to seriousinjury or vehicle damage. Do not use thetie down points for towing.
Each tie down point has a maximumload rating. Exceeding this may leadto serious injury and vehicle damage.
WARNINGSAlways inspect the tie down pointsbefore use.
Note: The number of tie down points may vary depending on your vehicle model.
121
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Load Carrying
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 124/266
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum loadper tie down point stamped on it.
CleatA
BezelB
SpringC
PinD
Do not use the tie down points under thefollowing conditions:
• Any sign of wear or damage.
• Rail channels supporting the tie downpoints show any sign of wear, damageor distortion.
122
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Load Carrying
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 125/266
• Locking bezel is damaged or broken orwill not lock into place.
• Not seated correctly within the support
rail.Fitting the Tie Down Points
WARNING
Bezel must be fully engage into therail to secure the tie down point forsafe use. The word ‘Not Locked’ will
be visible in the incorrectly installed tiedowns.
1. Engage the base of the tie down pointinto the rail channel while holding thecleat vertically.
2. Slide along the rail until the pin on thebase of the tie down engages in adesired hole on the rail.
3. Push the tie down in and rotate aquarter turn clockwise until the tiedown cleat is horizontal and the lockingbezel “snaps” into place.
Removing the Tie Down Points
1. Grasp the locking bezel between thethumb and fingers using the fingerrecess.
2. Pull the bezel away from the rail untilthe base of the tie down point is fully
disengaged from the rail channel.3. Turn the tie down point a quarter turn
anticlockwise until it snaps out of therail.
Load Rest
WARNINGS
A loaded load rest alters the vehicle'scenter of gravity and aerodynamics.Take care when cornering, driving in
crosswinds and at high speeds.
Do not exceed the permissible grossweight. See Vehicle IdentificationPlate (page 190).
123
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Load Carrying
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 126/266
Note: Secure luggage or cargo placed onthe load rest with the load rest stoppers.
TAILGATEWARNINGS
Do not exceed the maximumpermissible tailgate load of 485 lb(220 kg).
Do not lower the tailgate completelyin the vehicles with a tow ball or abumper.
Make sure that you keep a firm grip
of the tailgate to prevent it fromdropping down.
Lowering the Tailgate
1. Raise the tailgate slightly.
2. Pull the support cable rearwards.
3. Release the support cable fromtailgate.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to pull out thesupport cable on the other side.
Note: Lower the tailgate for better ingressor egress of the loads.
124
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Load Carrying
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 127/266
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h).
Do not exceed the maximumpermissible gross train weight stated.See Recommended Towing
Weights (page 126).
Do not exceed the maximumpermissible nose weight, e.g. verticalweight on the tow ball. See
Recommended Towing Weights (page
126).Do not exceed the maximumpermissible axle load stated on yourvehicle identification plate. See
Vehicle Identification Plate (page 190).
The anti-lock braking system doesnot control the overrun brake on thetrailer.
Note: Vehicles equipped with electronic
stability program (ESP) have trailer stability control included.
When towing a trailer:
• Obey country specific regulations fortowing a trailer.
• Do not exceed 62.1 mph (100 km/h)even if a country allows higher speedsunder certain conditions.
• Place loads as low as possible andcentral to the axle of your trailer. For
best stability of the trailer in an unladenvehicle, place the load in the trailertowards the nose within the maximumnose load as this gives the beststability. See Recommended TowingWeights (page 126).
• Reduce the stipulated maximumpermitted gross train weight by 10%for every additional 3,280.84 ft(1,000 m) in high altitude regions
above 3,280.84 ft (1,000 m).
• Use a low gear when descending asteep downhill gradient.
The stability of your vehicle to trailercombination is very much dependent onthe quality of the trailer.
Trailer Tow Module
WARNINGS
Do not connect the trailer patchharness to the vehicle when thetrailer is not connected.
Make sure that the indicator andbrake lamps do not flicker withengine running while using a trailer
with low power LED lamps.
Vehicles with factory fitted tow bar includea trailer plug control module for trailerlighting. Along with trailer plug
functionality, it also protects the vehicle’sprimary electrical circuits and some trailerelectrical failures.
You can purchase a trailer tow kit from anauthorized dealer for the vehicles withoutfactory fitted tow bar. This enables the towbar installation.
The kit includes:
• Trailer plug
•Wiring and hardware components
• Trailer plug control module
Note: Have the trailer tow electrical kitconfigured by an authorized dealer.
Connect a trailer patch harness betweenthe trailer and the vehicle to overcomeflickering and correct operation of the rearparking aid.
125
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Towing
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 128/266
Note: The trailer patch harness is availablewith the Ford authorized dealer.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROLNote: The system automatically turns onevery time you switch the ignition on.
Note: Switching off the stability control willturn off the system.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailersfrom swaying.
Trailer sway control is an enhanced featureof stability control system andautomatically detects when an attachedtrailer starts to sway. This feature applies
your vehicle brakes at individual wheelsand if necessary, reduces engine power. Ifthe trailer begins to sway, slow your vehicledown, pull safely to the side of the roadand check for correct load distribution.See Towing a Trailer (page 125).
Note: Shift to 4L will deactivate trailer sway control.
Note: Switching on the electronic lockingdifferential will turn off the system.
Note: To switch off the trailer sway control as required, See Stability Control (page107).
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Towing Capacities - For Base Series
Max. GrossTrain Weight
With TrailerBrake
Without TrailerBrake
Transmis-sion
DriveVariant
9,755 lb(4,425 kg)
3,307 lb(1,500 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4X22.5L Petrol
9,976 lb(4,525 kg)
3,307 lb(1,500 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2*
9,094 lb(4,125 kg)
2,425 lb(1,100 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x4
9,755 lb(4,425 kg)
3,307 lb(1,500 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4X22.2L Diesel88kW
9,976 lb(4,525 kg)3,307 lb(1,500 kg)1,653 lb(750 kg)Manual4x4
9,976 lb(4,525 kg)
3,307 lb(1,500 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2* and
4x4
2.2L Diesel92kW
126
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Towing
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 129/266
Max. GrossTrain Weight
With TrailerBrake
Without TrailerBrake
Transmis-sion
DriveVariant
9,755 lb(4,425 kg)
3,307 lb(1,500 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x22.2L Diesel110kW
10,362 lb(4,700 kg)
3,307 lb(1,500 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2* and
4x4
10,362 lb(4,700 kg)
3,307 lb(1,500 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2* and
4x4
3.2L Diesel
Towing capacities- For all other series
Max. GrossTrain Weight
With TrailerBrake
Without TrailerBrake
Transmis-sion
DriveVariant
11,299 lb(5,125 kg)
4,850 lb(2,200 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4X22.5L Petrol
10,803 lb(4,900 kg)
3,748 lb(1,700 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2*
9,480 lb(4,300 kg)
2,425 lb(1,100 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x4
11,299 lb(5,125 kg)4,850 lb(2,200 kg)1,653 lb(750 kg)Manual4X22.2L Diesel88kW &92kW
10,582 lb(4,800 kg)
3,527 lb(1,600 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2* and
4x4
11,960 lb(5,425 kg)
5,512 lb(2,500 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x22.2L Diesel110kW
11,023 lb(5,000 kg)
3,968 lb(1,800 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2*
Drive ratio3.31
13,118 lb
(5,950 kg)1
7,385 lb
(3,350 kg)1
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2* and
4x413,228 lb
(6,000 kg)2
7,716 lb
(3,500 kg)2
Drive ratio3.55
13,118 lb
(5,950 kg)1
7,385 lb
(3,350 kg)1
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Auto4x2* and
4x4
127
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Towing
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 130/266
Max. GrossTrain Weight
With TrailerBrake
Without TrailerBrake
Transmis-sion
DriveVariant
13,228 lb
(6,000 kg)2
7,716 lb
(3,500 kg)2
11,023 lb(5,000 kg)
3,968 lb(1,800 kg)
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2* and
4x4
3.2L Diesel
Drive ratio3.31
13,118 lb
(5,950 kg)1
7,385 lb
(3,350 kg)1
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Manual4x2* and
4x413,228 lb
(6,000 kg)2
7,716 lb
(3,500 kg)2
Drive ratio
3.55
13,118 lb
(5,950 kg)1
7,385 lb
(3,350 kg)1
1,653 lb(750 kg)
Auto4x2* and
4x413,228 lb
(6,000 kg)2
7,716 lb
(3,500 kg)2
*Vehicles with increased ride height
1 European vehicles built before 11th March 2013 and all non-European vehicles.
2 European vehicles built on or after 11th March 2013.
Note: See an authorized dealer to confirm your vehicle build date.
Trailer Nose Weight
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum permissible nose weight, e.g. vertical weight on thetow ball. This is important for vehicle and trailer stability.
Maximum Nose WeightMinimum Nose WeightDrive
364 lb (165 kg)6% of the towed weight4x2
496 lb (225 kg)4x2* and 4x4
*Vehicles with increased ride height
128
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Towing
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 131/266
TOW BALL
WARNINGS
Never leave the detached tow ballarm unsecured inside the vehicle.This would increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
When not in use, always transportthe tow ball arm securely fastenedin the luggage compartment.
Take special care when fitting thetow ball arm as the safety of thevehicle and the trailer depends on
this.Do not modify the trailer coupling.
Do not disassemble or repair the towball arm.
A trailer socket and the tow ball arm seatare provided underneath the rear bumper.Turn the trailer socket down through 90degrees until it engages in the correct
position.
4x2
Inserting the tow ball arm
1. Insert the tow ball arm in to the seat.
WARNING
Make sure that the tow ball arm isfully engaged in the seat.
Driving with a trailer
WARNING
If any of the following conditionscannot be met, do not use the towbar and have it inspected by properly
trained technicians.
Before starting your journey, make surethat:
• The tow ball is correctly locked.
• The tow ball arm is fully engaged in itsseat.
129
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Towing
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 132/266
Removing the tow ball arm
1. Push the lever towards the center ofthe vehicle.
2. Turn the lever counterclockwise tounlock the tow ball arm.
3. Remove the tow ball arm.
4x2 (vehicles with increased rideheight) and 4x4
Tighten the bolts to 218 ± 42 Nm.
Driving without a trailer
1. Remove the tow ball arm.
2. Install the plug into its seat.
WARNINGS
To avoid risk of injury, never unlockthe tow ball arm with the trailer
attached.Remove the tow ball when drivingwithout a trailer.
Maintenance
Keep the system clean.
Periodically lubricate the tow ballmechanism with resin-free grease or oiland the lock with graphite.
TOWING POINTS
Front towing eyeA
Rear towing eyeB
Note: The second front towing point isoptional.
Note: The rear towing point is optional.
130
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Towing
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 133/266
TOWING THE VEHICLE ONFOUR WHEELS
All VehiclesWARNINGS
Switch the ignition on when towingthe vehicle.
The brake and steering assistancewill not operate unless the engine isrunning. Press the brake pedal harder
and allow for increased stopping distancesand heavier steering.
Too much tension in the tow ropecould cause damage to your vehicleor the vehicle that is towing.
Do not use a rigid tow bar on thefront towing eye.
2WD: When towing your vehicle youmust select neutral.
4WD: Do not tow the vehicle with allwheels on the ground while in 4WDmode. Tow your vehicle with all
wheels off the ground or all wheels on theground while the vehicle is in 2WD modein an event of a breakdown or mechanicalfailure of the transmission.
Drive off slowly and smoothly withoutjerking the vehicle you are towing.
Vehicles With AutomaticTransmission
WARNINGSIf a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h) anda distance of 12.4 mi (20 km) is to beexceeded the drive wheels must be
lifted clear of the ground.
WARNINGS
It is recommended not to tow withthe drive wheels on the ground.
However, if it is required to move yourvehicle from a dangerous location, do nottow your vehicle faster than 12 mph(20 km/h) or further than 12.4 mi (20 km).
Do not tow your vehicle backward.
In the event of a mechanical failureof the transmission the drive wheelsmust be lifted clear of the ground.
Do not tow your vehicle if the
ambient temperature is below 32°F(0°C).
131
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Towing
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 134/266
BREAKING-IN
Tires
WARNING
New tires need to be run-in forapproximately 300 miles (500kilometers). During this time, you
may experience different drivingcharacteristics.
Brakes and Clutch
WARNING
Avoid heavy use of the brakes andclutch if possible for the first 100miles (150 kilometers) in town and
for the first 1000 miles (1500 kilometers)on freeways.
Engine
WARNING
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1000 miles (1500 kilometers). Varyyour speed frequently and changeup through the gears early. Do not laborthe engine.
GENERAL DRIVING POINTS
Vehicles with a diesel engine
If the low fuel level warning lamp comeson, refuel as soon as possible. If you
continue driving without refueling, theengine will start to run unevenly. Thisindicates that you are about to run out offuel. Refuel immediately.
COLD WEATHERPRECAUTIONS
The functional operation of somecomponents and systems can be affectedat temperatures below -13°F (-25°C).
REDUCED ENGINEPERFORMANCE
WARNING
Continued operation of theoverheating engine will increase the
temperature further, and cause theengine to shut down completely.
Drive the overheating engine only for a briefamount of time without damage to theengine. The engine will continue to operatewith limited power. The distance you cantravel depends on ambient temperature,vehicle load, and terrain.
If the needle in the engine coolant
temperature gauge moves to the upperlimit position, the engine is overheating.See Gauges (page 53).
If the engine temperature continues to rise,the fuel supply to the engine will reduce.The air conditioning will also turn off andthe engine cooling fan will operate.
When this happens:
immediately
• Stop your vehicle as soon as possible.
• Immediately turn off the engine toprevent severe engine damage.
• Wait for the engine to cool down.
• Check the coolant level. See EngineCoolant Check (page 159).
• Have the vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer.
132
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Driving Hints
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 135/266
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNINGS
Drive through water in an emergencyonly and not as part of normaldriving.
Engine damage can occur if waterenters the air filter.
In an emergency, you can drive your vehiclethrough water to a maximum depth asshown and at a maximum speed of4.3 mph (7 km/h). You must take extra
care when driving through flowing water.23.6220 in (600 mm)
4x2
600mm (23.6 inches)X
4x2 (Vehicles with Increased RideHeight) and 4x4
800mm (31.5 inches)Y
When driving in water, maintain a lowspeed and do not stop your vehicle. Afterdriving through water and as soon as it issafe to do so:
• Depress the brake pedal lightly tocheck that the brakes are functioningcorrectly.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that your vehicle's lamps arefully operational.
• Check the power assistance of thesteering system.
FLOOR MATS
133
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Driving Hints
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 136/266
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that aredesigned to fit the foot well of your
vehicle, leaving the pedal areaunobstructed, and which can be firmlysecured to retention posts so that theycannot slip out of position and interferewith the pedals or impair safe operation ofyour vehicle in other ways.
Incorrectly fitted floor mats cancause the accelerator pedal tobecome stuck in the open position.
This can cause loss of vehicle control.
Always correctly install the floor
mats to the retention posts so thatthey cannot slip out of position or
obstruct pedal operation.
Do not place unsecured floor matsor any other covering in the foot well.
Do not place additional floor matsor any other covering on top of theoriginal floor mats. This will reduce
the pedal clearance and interfere with thepedal operation.
Do not allow objects to fall orbecome trapped under the pedals ofyour vehicle. This can cause loss of
vehicle control.
Carry out regular inspections to makesure the floor mats are secure.
To install the floor mats, position the floormat eyelet over the retention post andpress down to lock in position.
Remove in reverse order.
134
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Driving Hints
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 137/266
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard warning button is located onthe instrument panel. Use it when yourvehicle is creating a safety hazard for othermotorists.
Press the button to turn on the hazardwarning function, and the front and reardirection indicators will flash.
Press the button again to turn them off.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will lose charge. There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Depending on applicable laws and regulations in the country for which your vehicle was originally built, the hazard warning flashers may flash if you brake heavily.
FIRST AID KITNote: First aid kit is secured in the passenger side storage compartment.
WARNING TRIANGLE
Single cab
A retaining strap behind the passenger seatcan be used to secure a warning triangle.
Fold the seatback forward.1
Stretch cab
Note: The warning triangle can be secured in the tool bin below the rear seats.
135
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Roadside Emergencies
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 138/266
Remove the rear seat cushion.1
Remove the cover.2
Double cab
Fold the rear seatback forward.1
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Do not use fuel lines, engine rockercovers or the intake manifold asgrounding points.
Connect batteries with only the samenominal voltage.
Always use booster cables withinsulated clamps and adequate sizecable.
Never jump start the vehicle at theauxiliary battery.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery from your vehicle’ s electrical system.
136
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Roadside Emergencies
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 139/266
To Connect the Booster Cables
Flat battery vehicleA
Booster battery vehicleB
Positive connection cableC
Negative connection cableD
1. Position the vehicles so that they donot touch one another.
2. Switch off the engine and any electricalequipment.
3. Connect the positive (+) terminal ofvehicle B with the positive (+) terminalof vehicle A (cable C).
4. Connect the negative (-) terminal ofvehicle B to the ground connection ofvehicle A (cable D).
WARNINGS
Do not connect directly to thenegative (–) terminal of the flatbattery.
Make sure that the cables are clear
of any moving parts and fuel deliverysystem parts.
To Start the Engine
1. Run the engine of vehicle B at amoderately high speed.
2. Start the engine of vehicle A.
3. Run both vehicles for a minimum ofthree minutes before disconnecting thecables.
WARNING
Do not switch the headlamps onwhen disconnecting the cables. Thepeak voltage could blow the bulbs.
Disconnect the cables in the reverse order.
137
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Roadside Emergencies
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 140/266
FUSE BOX LOCATIONS
Left-Hand Drive
Right-Hand Drive
Engine compartment fuse boxA
Passenger compartment fusebox
B
Auxiliary fuse boxC
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Release the catches and remove the cover.
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
Fully open the driver's side storagecompartment.
138
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 141/266
Auxiliary Fuse Box
Release the catches and remove the cover.
139
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 142/266
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating
Fuse
Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Battery)601
Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Battery)602
Engine cooling fan503 (Petrol)
Glow plug control module603 (Diesel)
Anti-lock brake system module404
Power windows (front and rear)305
140
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 143/266
Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating
Fuse
Four wheel drive (4WD) motor ground256
Not used-7
Not used-8
Power seats209
Power windows (front)2510
Blower motor3011
Four wheel drive (4WD) motor power2512
Starter solenoid2013
Heated rear window2014
Flex-fuel pump1015 (Petrol)
Vaporizer glow plug2015 (Diesel)
Air conditioning clutch1016
Power windows (front)2517
Windscreen wiper motor2518
Windscreen wiper motor ground2519
Cigar lighter2020
Horn1521
Fuel injectors, flex-fuel valve1522
Differential lock solenoid1023
Auxiliary power socket instrument panel, console top2024
Ignition coils, temperature and mass air flow sensor, glowplug module, vacuum control valve (VCV), electronicvacuum regulator valve (EVRV)
1525
Electronic control module (ECM)7.526
Transmission control module (TCM)1027
Heated exhaust gas oxygen, universal heated exhaust gasoxygen-sensor, relay coils
1028
141
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 144/266
Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating
Fuse
Electronic control module (ECM)1529
Battery monitoring sensor1530
Auxiliary power socket (rear console)2031
Air conditioning pressure switch532
Transmission control module (TCM)1033
Positive temperature coefficient (PTC) heater534
Passenger compartment fuse box supply (Ignition)2035
Anti-lock brake system module536
Headlamp leveling1037
Heated seat2038
Power mirrors1039
Not used-40
Heated mirrors1041
Alarm horn1042
Heated windscreen (right)3043
Heated windscreen (left)3044
Anti-lock brake system module2545
Auxiliary power socket (floor console)2046
Trailer tow module2047
Not used-48
Not used-49Ignition relay, relay coils550
Power windows (rear)3051
142
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 145/266
Protected ComponentsRelay Number
Key interlockR1
Wiper on or offR2
HornR3
Air conditioning clutchR4
Differential lockR5
Wiper Hi or LoR6
Engine cooling fan lowR7
Engine cooling fan highR8
Flex-fuel pump, vaporizer glow plugR9
Heated rear windowR10
Heated windscreenR11
Not usedR12
Electronic control module (ECM) powerhold
R13
IgnitionR14
4WD motor 2 (clockwise)R15
4WD motor 1 (counter clockwise)R16
4WD motorR17
Security hornR18
StarterR19
Not usedR20
Not usedR21
Not usedR22
Not usedR23
Not usedR24
143
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 146/266
Protected ComponentsRelay Number
Not usedR25
Blower motorR26
Power seatR27
144
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 147/266
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box
145
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 148/266
Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating
Fuse
Fuel pump2056
Not used-57
Not used-58
Passive anti-theft system (PAT)559
Interior lamp, driver's door switch pack, mood lights,puddle lights, automatic shifter, footwell lamp
1060
Not used-61
Rain sensor module562
Not used-63
Not used-64
Not used-65
Driver's door unlock, central double locking2066
Stop lamp switch567
Not used-68
Instrument cluster, integrated control module (ICP),tracking and blocking module
569
Central locking2070
Air conditioning571
Alarm horn7.572
On-board diagnostics II573
Main beam2074
Front fog lamps1575
Reversing lamp, rear view mirror1076
Washer pump2077
Ignition switch578
Audio signal DIN, FSAO audio, multi-function display1579
146
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 149/266
Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating
Fuse
Multi-function display, Hi audio, brake valve closing (BVC)module2080
Interior motion sensor581
Washer pump ground2082
Central locking ground2083
Driver's door unlock, central double locking ground2084
Instrument cluster, parking aid module, rear view camera,manual air conditioning, rear view mirror, tracking and
blocking module
7.585
Restraint system, passenger air-bag deactivation indicator1086
Tachograph587
Not used-88
Not used-89
Auxiliary Fuse Box
147
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 150/266
Protected ComponentsFuse AmpRating
Fuse
Driving Light251
Position lamp152
LED beacon103
Work lights154
Spare205
Power point206
Reversing lamp157
Direction indicators, stop lamp158
Crew chief59
Disable fuse (isolator ground)510
Not used-11
Not used-12
Protected ComponentsRelay Number
Work lightsR1
LED beaconR2
SpareR3
Position lampR4
Direction indicator (left)R5
Direction indicator (right)R6
Stop lampR7
Not usedR8
Not usedR9
148
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 151/266
CHANGING A FUSE
WARNINGS
Do not modify the electrical systemof your vehicle in any way. Haverepairs to the electrical system and
the replacement of relays and high currentfuses carried out by an authorized dealer.
Switch the ignition and all electricalequipment off before attempting tochange a fuse.
Always replace a fuse with one thathas the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperagerating can cause severe wire damage andcould start a fire.
If electrical components in your vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Abreak in the fuse wire will indicate a blownfuse. Check the appropriate fuses beforereplacing any electrical components.
149
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Fuses
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 152/266
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to helpmaintain its roadworthiness and resalevalue. There is a large network of Fordauthorized repairers that are there to helpyou with their professional servicingexpertise. Authorized repairers are bestqualified to service your vehicle properlyand expertly, with a wide range of highlyspecialized tools.
In addition to regular servicing, werecommend that you carry out thefollowing checks.
WARNINGSSwitch the ignition off beforetouching or attempting adjustmentof any kind.
Do not touch the electronic ignitionsystem parts after you have switchedthe ignition on or when the engine is
running. The system operates at highvoltage.
Keep your hands and clothing clear
of the engine cooling fan. Undercertain conditions, the fan may
continue to run for several minutes afteryou have switched the engine off.
Make sure that you fit filler capssecurely after carrying outmaintenance checks.
Daily Checks
• Exterior lamps.
• Interior lamps.
• Warning lamps and indicators.
Check When Refueling
• Engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check(page 158).
• Brake fluid level. See Brake andClutch Fluid Check (page 160).
• Washer fluid level. See Washer FluidCheck (page 161).
• Tire pressures (when cold). See
Technical Specifications (page 180).• Tire condition. See Wheels and Tires
(page 174).
Monthly Checks
• Engine coolant level (engine cold). SeeEngine Coolant Check (page 159).
• Pipes, hoses and reservoirs for leaks.
• Air conditioning operation.
• Parking brake operation.
• Horn operation.
• Tightness of lug nuts. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 180).
OPENING AND CLOSING THEHOOD
Opening the hood
1. Pull the lever under the instrumentpanel. For item location: SeeInstrument Panel Overview (page15). .
150
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 153/266
2. Raise the hood slightly.
3. Move the catch towards the left-handside of the vehicle.
4. Open the hood.
5. Support it with the strut.
Closing the hood
Note: Make sure that the hood is closed properly.
Lower the hood and allow it to drop fromunder its own weight for the last 20 – 30centimeters (8 - 11 inches).
151
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 154/266
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.5L DURATEC-HE (122KW/165PS)- MI4
RHD
152
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 155/266
LHD
Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Coolant Check (page 159).A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir cap. See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page160).
B
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine Oil Check (page 158).C
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Check (page 158).D
Engine junction box. See Fuses (page 138).E
Vehicle Identificaton Plate. See Capacities and Specifications (page 182).F
Battery. See Roadside Emergencies (page 135).G
Power steering fluid reservoir cap. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page159).
H
Air Cleaner.I
Washer fluid reservoir cap. See Washer Fluid Check (page 161).J1 The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.
153
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 156/266
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.2L DURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA)DIESEL
RHD
154
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 157/266
LHD
Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Coolant Check (page 159).A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir cap. See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page160).
B
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 158).C
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine Oil Check (page 158).D
Fuel filter water trap. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 160).E
Engine junction box. See Fuses (page 138).F
Vehicle Identificaton Plate. See Capacities and Specifications (page 182).G
Battery. See Roadside Emergencies (page 135).H
Power steering fluid reservoir cap. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page159).
I
155
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 158/266
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 159/266
LHD
Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Coolant Check (page 159).A
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir cap. See Brake and Clutch Fluid Check (page160).
B
Engine oil dipstick1. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 158).C
Engine oil filler cap1. See Engine Oil Check (page 158).D
Fuel filter water trap. See Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap (page 160).E
Engine junction box. See Fuses (page 138).F
Vehicle Identificaton Plate. See Capacities and Specifications (page 182).G
Battery. See Roadside Emergencies (page 135).H
Power steering fluid reservoir cap. See Power Steering Fluid Check (page159).
I
157
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 160/266
Washer fluid reservoir cap. See Washer Fluid Check (page 161).J
Air Cleaner.K1
The filler caps and the engine oil dipstick are colored for easy identification.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.5LDURATEC-HE (122KW/165PS)- MI4
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.2LDURATORQ-TDCI (PUMA)DIESEL/3.2L DURATORQ-TDCI(PUMA) DIESEL
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on levelground.
2. Switch off the engine and wait 10minutes for the oil to drain into the oilpan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it witha clean, lint free cloth. Replace thedipstick and remove it again to checkthe oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, addoil immediately. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).
Note: Check the oil level before starting theengine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is between the minimum and the maximum marks.
Note: Do not use oil additives or other engine treatments. Under certain conditions,they may damage the engine.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines reaches its normal level after approximately 3000 miles (5000 kilometers).
Adding Oil
WARNINGS
Only add oil when the engine is cold.If the engine is hot, wait 10 minutesfor the engine to cool down. Failure
to take care may result in personal injury.
Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running. Failure to takecare may result in personal injury.
158
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 161/266
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add oil that meets Ford specifications.See Technical Specifications (page
169).3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the maximum mark. Oil levels above the maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an absorbent cloth immediately.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING
Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
Note: Make sure that the level is betweenthe MIN and the MAX marks.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Thelevel may therefore extend beyond the MAX mark.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add coolantimmediately.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNINGS
Only add coolant when the engine iscold. If the engine is hot, wait 10minutes for the engine to cool down.
Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is running.
Do not remove the filler cap whenthe engine is hot. Wait for the engineto cool down.
Undiluted coolant is flammable andmay ignite if spilt on a hot exhaust.
Note: In an emergency, you can add justwater to the cooling system to reach avehicle service station. Have the systemchecked by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Note: Prolonged use of incorrect dilutionof the coolant can cause engine damagefrom corrosion, overheating or freezing.
Note: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
1. Remove the filler cap. Any pressure willescape slowly as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add a 50/50 mixture of coolant and
water using fluid that meets the Fordspecifications. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until youfeel a strong resistance.
POWER STEERING FLUIDCHECK
WARNING
Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.
Note: Make sure that the fluid level is between the MIN and the MAX marks.
If the level is at the MIN mark, top upimmediately. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).
Adding Power Steering Fluid
Note: Do not add fluid further than the MAX mark.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add fluid that meets Fordspecifications. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).
3. Replace the filler cap.
159
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 162/266
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUIDCHECK
WARNINGSUse of any fluid other than therecommended brake fluid mayreduce brake efficiency and not meet
Ford's performance standards.
Do not allow the fluid to touch yourskin or eyes. If this happens, rinse theaffected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your doctor.
Clean the filler cap before removing.
Use only fluid that meets Fordspecifications and from a sealed
container.
Note: Keep brake fluid clean and dry.Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: The brake and the clutch systems are supplied from the same reservoir.
The fluid level will drop slowly as thebrakes wear, and will rise when the brakecomponents are replaced.
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAXlines are within the normal operating range;there is no need to add fluid.
If the fluid levels are outside of the normaloperating range, the performance of thesystem could be compromised; seekservice from you authorized dealer
immediately.Top up with fluid that meets the Fordspecification. See TechnicalSpecifications (page 169).
DRAINING THE FUEL FILTERWATER TRAP
WARNINGDo not dispose of diesel in householdrefuse or the public sewage system.Use your local authorized waste
disposal facilities.
Note: Only add fuel that meets the Ford specification. See Fuel Quality (page 87).
Note: The in-tank pump will turn off automatically after approximately 40
seconds.
For item location: See Under Hood
Overview (page 154). See Under HoodOverview (page 156).
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Connect and secure a suitable hose onthe filter drain plug.
3. Route the other end of the hose to thesuitable container.
4. Loosen the drain plug by approximately1.5 turns.
160
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 163/266
5. Switch the ignition on to activate thein-tank pump.
6. Allow the water to drain.
7. Switch the ignition off.8. Tighten the drain plug and remove the
hose.
9. Start the engine and check for leaks.
Note: The water-in-fuel indicator lamp will go out after approximately 2 seconds, withthe engine running.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
Note: The reservoir supplies the front and rear washer systems.
When adding fluid, use a mixture of washerfluid and water to help prevent freezing incold weather and improve the cleaningcapability. We recommend that you useonly high quality washer fluid.
For information on fluid dilution, refer tothe product instructions.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING
You must replace the battery withone of exactly the samespecification.
Main Battery
Note: Where applicable you must
reprogram the audio system using the keycode. See Security code (page 213).
The battery is located in the enginecompartment. See Maintenance (page150).
Auxiliary Battery
WARNING
Never jump start the vehicle at theauxiliary battery.
The auxiliary battery is located in theloadspace. See Rear Exterior Overview(page 13).
The auxiliary battery powers the auxiliaryloads connected to the vehicle regardlessof the engine status. The vehicle chargingsystem charges it when the engine isrunning. When the engine is not running, itis isolated from the vehicle power supplyto prevent drain from the main battery.
Note: Auxiliary battery does not providecranking power to the engine.
CHECKING THE WIPERBLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge ofthe blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge orcloth.
CHANGING THE WIPERBLADES
Set the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition to change the wiper blades.
To set the wiper in service position:
161
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 164/266
1. Turn the ignition key to position 0 fromposition II.
2. Pull the washer lever towards the
steering wheel within three seconds.You can use the service position in winterto provide easier access to the wiperblades for freeing them from snow and ice.The windscreen wipers will return to theirnormal position as soon as you switch theignition on, so make sure that the outsideof the windscreen is free from snow andice before you switch the ignition on.
To change the wiper blade:
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm awayfrom the glass.
2. Turn the wiper blade.
3. Release the lock.
4. Rotate the wiper blade.
5. Move in the direction shown.
6. Remove the wiper blade.
7. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locksinto place. Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield. The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal positionwhen the ignition is turned on.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch the lamps and the ignition off.Failure to follow this warning couldresult in serious personal injury.
162
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 165/266
WARNINGS
Make sure the bulbs have cooleddown before removing them. Failure
to follow this warning could result inserious personal injury.
Note: Only fit bulbs of the correct specification. See Bulb SpecificationChart (page 168).
Note: The following instructions describe how to remove the bulbs. Fit replacementsin the reverse order unless otherwise stated.
Headlamp
1. Open the hood. See Opening andClosing the Hood (page 150).
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the rubber cover.
4. Release the clip and remove the bulb.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Note: Make sure that the rubber covers seals correctly against the bulb and headlamp housing.
Side Lamp and Direction Indicator
Direction indicatorA
Side lampB
1. Remove the bulb holder by pulling itstraight out.
2. Remove the bulb.
Side Repeater
1. Slide the lens to the rear and removeit.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
163
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 166/266
Approach Lamp and Side Repeater
Side repeaterA
Approach lampB
Note: These lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if it fails.
Front Fog Lamps
Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp
bulb from the bulb holder.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.
Rear Lamps
Type 1
Tail, Brake, Reversing, Fog Lamp andDirection Indicator
164
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 167/266
Tail and brake lampA
Direction indicatorB
Reversing lampC
Fog lamp (left-hand side forLHD)
D
1. Open the tail gate.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Remove the rear lamp.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.
5. Remove the bulb.
Type 2
Tail, Brake, Reversing Lamp andDirection Indicator
Direction indicatorA
Tail and brake lampB
Reversing lampC
1. Remove the screws.
2. Remove the lamp lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
License Plate Lamp
Type 1
165
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 168/266
1. Carefully release the spring clip andremove the lamp.
2. Remove the connector with bulb.
3. Remove the bulb.
Type 2
1. Remove the screws.
2. Remove the lamp lens.
3. Remove the bulb.
Interior Lamp
Stretch and Double Cab
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.
3. Remove the bulb.
Reading Lamp
Type 1
Without Alarm Sensor
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwiseand remove it.
3. Remove the bulb.
166
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 169/266
Type 2
With Alarm Sensor
1. Carefully prise out the lamp.
2. For reading lamps, turn the bulb holdercounterclockwise and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb.
4. For center lamp, remove the lamp lens.
5. Remove the bulb.
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp
Type 1
1. Remove the lamp lens.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Carefully prise out the lamp.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Turn the bulb holder 45°counterclockwise and remove it.
6. Remove the bulb.
167
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 170/266
Type 2
1. Remove the lamp lens.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Carefully prise out the lamp.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. Remove the bulb holder by pulling itstraight out.
6. Remove the bulb.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Power (watts)SpecificationBulb
55/60H4Headlamp main and dipped
beam
21P21WFront direction indicator
5W5WSide lamp
55H11Front fog lamp
5-Side repeater*
21WY21WRear direction indicator
21/5W21/5WTail and brake lamp
21W21WReversing lamp
21W21WRear fog lamp
5W5WNumber plate lamp
5W5WInterior lamp
168
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 171/266
Power (watts)SpecificationBulb
5W5WReading lamp
5W5WCenter high mount stoplamp
5W5WRoof bar lamp
* Bulb replacement is not possible as the
bulb is an integral part of the unit. The siderepeater lamp unit has to be changed.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle fluids
SpecificationRecommended fluidPart
WSS-M2C-913-CCastrol Engine OilEngine oil - Diesel (formarkets with low sulphur
content less than 350 ppm)WSS-M2C-913-D
WSS-M2C-921-ACastrol Engine OilEngine oil - Diesel (formarkets with high sulphurcontent greater than 350
ppm)
WSS-M2C-913-D
WSS M2C913-CCastrol Engine OilEngine oil - GasolineWSS-M2C-913-DWSS-M2C929-AWSS M2C930-AWSS M2C946-AWSS M2C945-A
WSD-M2C200-CCastrol - BOT130-MTransmission oil - Manual(MT-75)
WSS-M2C200-D2Castrol - BOT350-M3Transmission oil - Manual(MT-82)
WSS-M2C938-A (XT-10QLV)
Motorcraft MERCON® LVTransmission oil - Auto-matic
WSS-M6C65-A2 SuperDot4-14M
Clutch/Brake
WSS-M2C938-A (XT-10QLV)
Motorcraft MERCON® LVPower assisted steering
169
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 172/266
SpecificationRecommended fluidPart
WSS-M97B44-D (XLC-0F02)
Chevron / ArtecoCoolant
WSP-M2C197-AFront Axles
WSP-M2C197-ACastrolRear Axles
WSS-M2C938-A (XT-10QLV)
Motorcraft MERCON® LVTransfer Case
WSH-M17B19-AR134ARefrigerant
WSH-M1C231-BPOLYALKYLENE GLYCOLAC Compressor lubricant
Your engine has been designed to be used with Castrol and Ford Engine Oil, which givesa fuel economy benefit whilst maintaining the durability of your engine.
Topping up the oil:
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with low sulphur content less than 350 ppm): Ifyou are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined in the vehicle fluidstable, you must use SAE 5W-30 that meets the specification defined by ACEA A5/B5.
Engine oil - Diesel (for markets with high sulphur content greater than 350 ppm):If you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification defined in the vehicle fluidstable, you must use SAE 10W-30 that meets the specification defined by API CH-4.
For gasoline engines only, if you are unable to find an oil that meets the specification
defined in the vehicle fluids table, you must use SAE 5W-20 or SAE 5W-30 that meetsthe specification defined by either ACEA A5/B5, API SM or API SN.
Using topping up oils other than the one specified can result in longer engine crankingperiods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and increased emissionlevels.
Castrol engine oil recommended.
170
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 173/266
Capacities
Capacity in Liters (gallons)ItemVariant
1.2 (0.26)Power assisted steeringfluid
All
5.5 (1.2)Windshield washer systemAll
80 (17.60)Fuel tankAll
10.5 (2.31)Transmission fluidAutomatic transmission(dry)
9 (1.97)Transmission fluidAutomatic transmission(wet)
1.7 (0.37)Transmission fluidManual transmission(MT75)
2.7 (0.59)Transmission fluidManual transmission(MT82)
8.6 (1.89)Engine oil - with filter2.2L Duratorq-TDCi
11.5 (2.53)Cooling system2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (MT75and MT82)
11.9 (2.62)Cooling system2.2L Duratorq-TDCi (AT)
9.75 (2.14)Engine oil - with filter3.2L Duratorq-TDCi
12.9 (2.84)Cooling system3.2L Duratorq-TDCi (MT82)
13.5 (2.97)Cooling system3.2L Duratorq-TDCi (AT)
6.7 (1.47)Engine oil - with filter2.5L Duratec-HE
11.0 (2.42)Cooling system2.5L Duratec-HE
171
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Maintenance
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 174/266
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
We recommend that you wash your vehicleregularly with a sponge and lukewarmwater containing a neutral pH carshampoo.
Never use strong household detergents orsoap, such as dish washing or laundryliquid. These products can discolor andcan cause spotting on painted surfaces.
Never wash your vehicle when it is hot tothe touch or during exposure to strong,direct sunlight.
Dry your vehicle with a chamois or softterry cloth towel in order to eliminate waterspotting.
Immediately remove items such asgasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings andinsect deposits as they can cause damageto your vehicle’s paintwork and trim overtime.
Suntan lotions and insect repellents candamage any painted surface. If thesesubstances come in to contact with your
vehicle, wash them off as soon as possible.
Using a Car Wash
WARNINGS
If you use a car wash with a waxingcycle, make sure that you remove thewax from the windshield.
Switch the heater blower off toprevent contamination of the freshair filter.
Prior to using a car wash facility check thesuitability of it for your vehicle.
Some car wash installations use water athigh pressure. This could damage certainparts of your vehicle.
Remove any exterior accessories, includingthe antenna, before using an automaticcar wash.
Cleaning the Headlamps
WARNINGS
Do not scrape the headlamp lensesor use abrasives, alcoholic solventsor chemical solvents to clean them.
Do not wipe the headlamps whenthey are dry.
Cleaning the Chrome Trim
Do not use abrasives or chemical solvents.Use soapy water.
Do not apply cleaning product to hotsurfaces.
Do not leave cleaning product on chromesurfaces longer than recommended.
Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners,or cleaning chemicals, may cause damageover a period of time.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and doordrain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to cleanplastic parts.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
Note: Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be covered by your warranty.
Safety Belts
WARNINGS
Do not use abrasives, or chemicalsolvents to clean them.
172
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Vehicle Care
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 175/266
WARNINGS
Do not allow moisture to penetratethe safety belt retractor mechanism.
Clean them with interior cleaner or waterapplied with a soft sponge. Let them drynaturally, away from artificial heat.
Instrument Cluster Screens, LCDScreens and Radio Screens
WARNING
Do not use abrasives, alcoholicsolvents or chemical solvents to
clean them.
Rear Windows
WARNING
Do not use any abrasive materials toclean the interior of the rearwindows.
Note: Do not install stickers or labels to the
interior of the rear windows.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINTDAMAGE
You should repair paintwork damagecaused by stones from the road or minorscratches as soon as possible. A choice ofproducts are available from an authorizeddealer.
Remove particles such as bird droppings,tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, roadsalt and industrial fallout before repairingpaint chips.
Always read and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ALLOYWHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical towarm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength (heavy-duty)cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, incombination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away theclear coat finish over a period of time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steelwool, fuels or strong household detergent.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning thewheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs, brake pads and linings.
Note: Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims and covers.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coatedwith a clear coat paint finish. To maintaintheir condition we recommend that you:
• Clean them weekly with therecommended wheel and tire cleaner.
• Use a sponge to remove heavydeposits of dirt and brake dustaccumulation.
• Rinse them thoroughly with apressurized stream of water when youhave completed the cleaning process.
We recommend that you use Ford servicewheel cleaner. Make sure that you readand follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Using other non-recommended cleaningproducts can result in severe andpermanent cosmetic damage.
173
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Vehicle Care
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 176/266
GENERAL INFORMATION
A decal with tire pressure data is locatedin the driver’s door opening.
Check and set the tire pressure at theambient temperature in which you areintending to drive your vehicle and whenthe tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures regularly tooptimize fuel economy.
Note: Use only approved wheel and tire sizes. Using other sizes could damage your vehicle and will make the National Type
Approval invalid.Note: If you change the diameter of the tiresfrom that fitted at the factory, the speedometer may not display the correct speed. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have the engine management system reprogrammed.
Note: If you intend to change the size of thewheels from that fitted at the factory, checkthe suitability with an authorized dealer.
USING WINTER TIRES
If winter tires are used you must make surethat you use the correct tire pressures. SeeTechnical Specifications (page 180).
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNINGS
Do not exceed 31 mph (50 km/h).
Do not use snow chains on snow-freeroads.
Only fit snow chains to specifiedtires. See Technical Specifications(page 180).
WARNINGS
If your vehicle has wheel trims,remove them before fitting snow
chains.
Only use snow chains of 10 millimeters orsmaller.
Only use snow chains on the driven wheels.
Note: The anti-lock brake system willcontinue to operate normally.
Vehicles with Stability Control
When stability control is on, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual drivingcharacteristics. To reduce this, switchtraction control off. See Using TractionControl (page 106).
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
Lug Nuts
You can obtain replacement locking lugnuts or a locking lug nut key using thereference number certificate.
Vehicles with a Spare Wheel
If the spare wheel is the same type andsize as your vehicle road wheel, you can fitthe spare wheel and continue to drive inthe normal manner.
WARNING
Only fit snow chains to specified
tires. See Technical Specifications(page 180).
Note: Your vehicle may exhibit someunusual driving characteristics.
174
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wheels and Tires
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 177/266
Vehicle Jack
WARNINGS
Do not use the vehicle jack otherthan when you are changing a wheelin an emergency.
The vehicle jack must not bedamaged or deformed and thethread is lubricated and free from
foreign material.
Never place anything between thevehicle jack and the ground.
Never place anything between the
vehicle jack and your vehicle.
Use a workshop type hydraulic jack forchanging between summer and wintertires.
Note: Use a jack with a minimum liftingcapacity of one tonne (one ton) and a lifting plate with a minimum diameter of 3.1496 in(80 mm).
The jack, wheel brace, and jack handle are
located in the cab.
Single Cab
1. Fold the left-hand side seatbackforward.
2. Remove the locking strap and removethe tools.
1. Fold the right-hand side seatbackforward.
175
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wheels and Tires
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 178/266
2. Loosen the jack, remove the bolt andremove the jack.
Stretch Cab
1. Pull the release strap.
2. Remove the rear seats.
3. Remove the cover.
4. Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the jack.
6. Remove the tools.Double Cab
1. Lift the release strap.
176
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wheels and Tires
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 179/266
2. Lower the seatback.
3. Remove the locking strap.
4. Remove the bolt.
5. Remove the jack.
Spare Wheel
Note: The spare wheel is located underneath the rear of the vehicle.
1. Assemble the handle.
2. Fully insert the jack handle into theguide hole. Turn counter-clockwiseuntil the wheel rests on the ground, andthere is slack in the cable.
3. Pass the bracket and cable through thewheel opening.
Jacking and Lifting Points
WARNINGYou must use the specified jackingpoints.
177
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wheels and Tires
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 180/266
Emergency use onlyA
MaintenanceB
Removing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Park your vehicle so that you do notobstruct the flow of traffic or placeyourself in any danger and set up a
warning triangle.
Make sure that your vehicle is on firmand level ground with the front
wheels pointing straight ahead.Switch the ignition off and apply theparking brake.
If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, shift into first or reversegear. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, shift into park (P).
Make sure all passengers are out ofyour vehicle.
178
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wheels and Tires
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 181/266
WARNINGS
Chock the diagonally opposite wheelto the punctured tire with an
appropriate block or wheel chock.Do not work on your vehicle whenthe jack is the only support. If thevehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Make sure that the vehicle jack isvertical to the jacking point and thebase is flat on the ground.
Note: Do not lay alloy road wheels face
down on the ground.
1. Assemble the jack handle.
Note: Assemble the three handles to jackthe rear of the vehicle.
2. Loosen the lug nuts.
3. Raise your vehicle until the tire is clearof the ground.
4. Remove the lug nuts and the roadwheel.
Installing a Road Wheel
WARNINGS
Use only approved wheel and tiresizes. Using other sizes coulddamage your vehicle and will make
the National Type Approval invalid. SeeTechnical Specifications (page 180).
Do not fit run flat tyres on vehiclesthat were not originally fitted withthem. Please contact your dealer for
more details regarding compatibility.
Make sure there is no lubrication(grease or oil) on the threads or thesurface between the wheel lugs and
nuts. This can cause the lug nuts to loosenwhile driving.
Do not install alloy wheels using lugnuts designed for use with steelwheels.
Note: Alloy wheel lug nuts are suitable for use on a steel spare wheel for a short time(maximum two weeks).
Note: Make sure the wheel and hub contact surfaces are free from foreign matter.
179
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wheels and Tires
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 182/266
Note: Make sure that the cones on the lug nuts are against the wheel.
1. Install the wheel.
2. Install the lug nuts and finger tight.3. Install the locking lug nut key.
4. Install all of the lug nuts and partiallytighten them in the sequence shown.
5. Lower your vehicle and remove thevehicle jack.
6. Fully tighten all of the lug nuts in thesequence shown. See Technical
Specifications (page 180).
7. Position the projection of the cap andthe projection of the hub correctly.
WARNING
Have the lug nuts checked fortightness and the tire pressurechecked as soon as possible.
Note: If the spare wheel is different in sizeor construction to the road wheels, have this replaced as soon as possible.
Stowing the Flat Tire
WARNING
Do not raise the spare wheel carrierwithout the wheel attached. Damagecan occur to the winch mechanism
if lowered without a wheel attached.
1. Place the wheel flat on the ground,outside of the wheel facing down.
2. Tilt the bracket, and pass it through thecenter of the wheel.
3. Fully insert the jack handle into theguide hole and turn clockwise.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Lug nut torque
Nm (Ib-ft)Wheel type
135 (99.6)All
180
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wheels and Tires
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 183/266
Tire pressures (cold tires)
Full loadEconomy Normal load
Tire sizeVariant RearFrontRearFrontRearFront
bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)bar (psi)
3.8 (54)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)215/70 R
16*4x2
3.0 (44)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)255/70 R
16*All
3.0 (44)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)265/65 R
17*All
3.0 (44)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.6 (38)2.4 (35)2.4 (35)265/60
R 18*All
*Only fit snow chains to specified tires.
181
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Wheels and Tires
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 184/266
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Single cab
182
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 185/266
Dimension in mm(inches)
Dimension DescriptionItem
5359 (211.0)Maximum lengthA
5434 (214.0)Maximum length - with bull barsA
1850 (72.8)Overall width - excluding exterior mirrorsB
1703 (67.0)Overall height (4x2)C
1800-1806 (70.9-71.1)Overall height (4x2* or 4x4)C
3220 (126.8)WheelbaseD
1590 (62.6)Track - front and rear (4x2)E
1560 (61.4)Track - front and rear (4x2* or 4x4)E
*Vehicles with increased ride height
4-door stretch cab
183
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 186/266
Dimension in mm(inches)
Dimension DescriptionItem
5359 (211.0)Maximum lengthA
1850 (72.8)Overall width - excluding exterior mirrorsB
1706 (67.2)Overall height (4x2)C
1804-1810 (71.0-71.2)1
Overall height (4x2* or 4x4)C
3220 (126.8)WheelbaseD
1590 (62.6)Track - front and rear (4x2)E
1560 (61.4)Track - front and rear (4x2* or 4x4)E
1Depending on tyre size
*
Vehicles with increased ride height
184
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 187/266
Double cab
185
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 188/266
Dimension in mm(inches)
Dimension DescriptionItem
5359 (211.0)Maximum lengthA
5434 (214.0)Maximum length - with bull barsA
1850 (72.8)Overall width - excluding exterior mirrorsB
1716 (67.5)Overall height (4x2)C
1815-1848 (71.4-72.8)1
Overall height (4x2* or 4x4)C
3220 (126.8)WheelbaseD
1590 (62.6)Track - front and rear (4x2)E
1560 (61.4)Track - front and rear (4x2* or 4x4)E
1 Depending on tyre size
*Vehicles with increased ride height
186
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 189/266
TOWBAR DIMENSIONS
4x2
187
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 190/266
4x2 (vehicles with increased ride height) and 4x4
Dimension in mm(inches)
Dimension DescriptionItem
124 ± 5 (4.8 ± 0.2)Attachment point - centre of tow ball (4x2)A
221.5 ± 5 (8.7 ± 0.2)Attachment point - centre of tow ball (4x2* or 4x4)A
188
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 191/266
Dimension in mm(inches)
Dimension DescriptionItem
588 (23.1)Centre of tow ball - side memberB
1176 (46.3)Outside of side memberC
419 ± 5 (16.5 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 1st attachment point
(4x2)D
363 ± 5 (14.3 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 1st attachment point
(4x2* or 4x4)
D
442 ± 5 (17.4 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 2nd attachment point
(4x2)E
386 ± 5 (15.2 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 2nd attachment point(4x2
* or 4x4)
E
542 ± 5 (21.3 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 3rd attachment point
(4x2)F
486 ± 5 (19.1 ± 0.2)Centre of tow ball - centre of 3rd attachment point
(4x2* or 4x4)
F
785 ± 5 (30.9 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 4th attachment point
(4x2)G
728 ± 5 (28.7 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 4th attachment point(4x2
* or 4x4)
G
429 ± 5 (16.8 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 5th attachment point
(4x2)H
373 ± 5 (14.7 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 5th attachment point
(4x2* or 4x4)
H
504 ± 5 (19.8 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 6th attachment point
(4x2)J
448 ± 5 (17.6 ± 0.2)Center of tow ball - centre of 6th attachment point(4x2* or 4x4)J
*Vehicles with increased ride height
189
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 192/266
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONPLATE
Vehicle identification numberA
Gross vehicle weightB
Gross train weightC
Maximum front axle weightD
Maximum rear axle weightE
The vehicle identification plate with yourvehicle identification number andmaximum weights is located on thebottom of the lock side of the passengerdoor aperture.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER
The vehicle identification number is on theleft-hand side of the instrument panel.
The vehicle identification number is alsostamped beneath the front door on thechassis, on the right-hand side.
190
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Capacities and Specifications
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 193/266
GENERAL INFORMATION
Press the relevant button on the unit bezelto access the system functions. This willtake you into the selected mode.
One hour mode
To conserve battery power, the system canbe operated in one hour mode. If theignition is off, press the ON/OFF button toswitch the system on. The system willautomatically switch off after one hour.
System notes
WARNINGS
The indicated maximum speed maynot be applicable to your vehicle. Itis always your responsibility to
control the vehicle, supervise any systemand obey the correct speed limit.
The front glass on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if hit with a hardobject. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material. In case
of contact with the skin, wash immediatelywith soap and water.
The unit is a highgrade laser productwhich uses an invisible laser beam.If this is handled incorrectly it can
emit dangerous rays. Do not attempt tolook through any openings in the unit.
CAUTIONS
Irregular shaped CDs and CDs with a
scratch protection film or selfadhesive labels attached should not
be used. Warranty claims, where this typeof disc is found to be inside an audio unitreturned for repair, will not be accepted.
Do not clean the unit with solvents oraerosol cleaning agents. Use only adamp cloth.
CAUTIONS
Do not insert foreign objects into anyof the unit disc drives or media card
slots.Do not insert more than one disc intothe unit disc drive.
Use only 12 cm (4.7 inches) discs or 8cm (3.1 inches) discs with a suitableadaptor.
Do not attempt to open the unit. If theunit malfunctions consult your dealer.
Improper use of settings andconnections, other than thoseexplained in this manual, can damage
the unit.
Do not turn the ignition key or attemptto start the engine while the softwareis updating.
The system is recommended for use whenthe ignition key is turned to the accessoryposition or when the engine is running. Ifthe system is used extensively when the
engine is not running, care needs to betaken to avoid draining the battery.
ROAD SAFETY
WARNINGS
The system provides you withinformation designed to help youreach your destination quickly and
safely.
For reasons of safety, the drivershould only program the systemwhen the vehicle is stationary.
The system provides no assistancewith respect to stop signs, trafficlights, areas under construction or
other important safety information.
191
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Navigation introduction
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 194/266
WARNINGS
Do not use the system until you havefamiliarized yourself with its
operation.Only view the system display whendriving conditions permit.
Safety information
Read and follow all stated safetyprecautions. Failure to do so may increaseyour risk of collision and personal injury.Ford Motor Company shall not be liablefor any damages of any type arising from
failure to follow these guidelines.
If detailed viewing of route instructions isnecessary, pull off the road when it is safeto do so and park your vehicle.
Do not use the navigation system to locateemergency services.
To use the system as effectively and safelyas possible, always use the latestnavigation information. Your dealer will beable to assist with this.
192
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Navigation introduction
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 195/266
Vehicles with SD navigationsystem
The system has a large range of features,
yet is easy and intuitive to use. Routeguidance is shown on the display screen.The screen provides full information foroperating the system through the use ofmenus, text screens and map displays.Screen selections are made by scrollingthrough the menus using the up, down, leftand right arrow buttons and pressing theOK button to activate the desired setting.
Basic operation
1. Press either the NAV or MENU buttonto enter the menu structure.
2. Use the up, down, left and right arrowbuttons and scroll through the variousselection lists.
3. Press the OK button to activate yourselection.
Selection lists
Various screens are presented which offer
a selection list of available options.
1. Select the option you require, or if it isnot shown on the screen use the upand down arrow buttons to view theremainder of the selection list.
2. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.
Alphanumeric keypad entry
When it is necessary to enter an address,
a keypad will appear prompting you toenter a postcode, city, or street.
1. Use the up, down, left and right arrowbuttons to select the letter or numberthat you require.
Note: As you spell the entry the results will appear in the display.
Note: The system will limit your entries toonly those characters which spell a valid entry.
2. Press the OK button to activate yourselection.
Route setting example
Navigation main screen
• To select the navigation system, pressthe NAV button. The road safetycaution will be displayed. To use thesystem, read the caution and press theOK button.
Destination input screen• Use the up and down arrow buttons
and scroll to Destination input.
• Press the OK button to activate yourselection.
Note: A list with several options is shown.
• Starting from the top, select thecountry followed by either thepostcode if available or city and streetname.
• Use the alphanumeric keypad andselection lists to select your addressdetails.
• Once sufficient information has beenentered, scroll to Start guidance andpress the OK button to activate yourselection.
Note: If you only need to navigate to a city center for example, full address details are not required.
• The route is now calculated and thescreen returns to the main navigationscreen with instructions on how toproceed.
• Follow the screen information andvoice prompts to reach yourdestination.
193
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Navigation Quick start
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 196/266
Descriptions for function buttons1-4
A
Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for thefunctions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.
194
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Navigation unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 197/266
Vehicles with SD navigation system
Function 1.A
Function 2.B
Seek down. CD track selection.See Station tuning control
(page 216). See Track selection(page 221).
C
On/off and volume control.D
Seek up. CD track selection. SeeStation tuning control (page216). See Track selection (page221).
E
Function 3.F
Function 4.G
OK.H
Telephone keypad, stationpresets and navigation keypad.See Using the telephone (page231). See Station preset
buttons (page 217). SeeNavigation Quick start (page193).
I
Clock.J
Traffic announcement. SeeTraffic information control(page 218).
K
Navigation arrows.L
195
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Navigation unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 198/266
Map.M
Information.N
Door lock indicator.OHazard warning flasher switch.P
Door lock button. See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).
Q
Navigation.R
Menu select.S
Phone menu. See Telephone(page 229).
T
Auxiliary, USB and iPod select.
See Auxiliary Power Points(page 79). See Auxiliary inputjack (page 226).
U
Radio and waveband select. SeeAudio unit operation (page216).
V
CD eject. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).
W
CD select. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).
X
LOADING THE NAVIGATIONDATA
Loading the navigation data
1. Load the navigation SD card into theaperture.
2. Press the NAV button. The road safety
warning will be shown in the display.3. Use the up and down arrow buttons to
select the required feature.
4. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.
For map updates and system upgradesplease refer to your dealer.
196
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Navigation unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 199/266
Most of the important settings for yournavigation unit can be accessed via theMENU or NAV button. The followingsection describes the various options and
how to use them.
For menu structures: See InformationDisplays (page 59).
Menu structure - Information andentertainment display - Vehicleswith navigation system
Route
This feature allows you to customize the
route to your specific journey requirements(for example continue route guidance,block specific sections of your route orselect specific sections of a route).
Destination input
This feature allows you to enter yourdestination details (for example enter citynames, enter street names or pick a placefrom a map).
TrafficThis feature allows you to customize howyou receive traffic information (forexample review and sort traffic messages,review your route or block parts of yourroute).
Home address
This feature allows you to start the routeguidance to your home address or change
the details of your home address.Last destinations
This feature allows quick access to ahistory of previous destinations entered inthe system. A detailed display will showthe complete stored information includingan overview map. Select the requiredrepeat destination from the list.
Favourites
This feature allows you to customize apersonal destination address book and
assign user defined names to addressesand locations. A detailed display will showthe complete stored information includingan overview map. Select the requiredrepeat destination from the list.
Points of interest
This feature allows you to customize theroute to your specific journey requirements(for example select a museum on route ora specific point of interest near your
destination).
Tour planning
This feature allows you to enter a numberof different destinations and select theorder in which you wish to visit them. Youcan also modify an existing tour or recall aprevious tour. The system willautomatically calculate and display yourchosen journey.
Store position
This feature allows you to store and nameyour current position.
Route options
This feature allows you to customize theroute to your specific journey requirements(for example select the fastest or mosteconomical route or select a route that willavoid tunnels, seasonal roads and toll
roads).
Special functions
This feature allows you to select GPS andsystem information or a demonstration ofthe system functionality.
197
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
System settings
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 200/266
Map display
This feature allows you to change the waythe map screen is displayed (for example
clean 2D and clean 3D view) and tocustomize display information for yourjourney (for example time to arrival andlane guidance).
Assistance options
This feature allows you to customizedisplay information for your journey (forexample signs, lanes and speed limits).
Personal data
This feature allows you to edit and deletepersonal data (for example your homeaddress).
Reset all settings
This feature allows you to reset thenavigation settings.
Menu structure - Information andentertainment display - All
vehiclesAudio settings
Adaptive volume
This feature allows you to adjust thevolume level to compensate for engine androad speed noise. You can turn this on andoff. See Automatic volume control(page 219).
Sound
This feature allows you to adjust the soundsettings (for example bass and treble.
Nav audio mixing
This feature allows you to adjust thevolume mix between the navigation voiceoutput and audio source.
DSP settings
This feature allows you to customizespeaker output relevant to seat positions.
See Digital signal processing (DSP)(page 219).
DSP equaliser
This feature allows you to select the musiccategory that most suits your listeningpreference. The audio output will changeto enhance the particular style of musicchosen. See Digital signal processing(DSP) (page 219).
NewsThis feature allows you to receive newsbulletins from stations on the FMwaveband or radio data system (RDS) andenhanced other network (EON) linkedstations, in the same way as trafficinformation is provided. You can turn thison and off. See News broadcasts (page219).
Alternative frequencies
This feature will search for and switch tothe strongest station signal when movingfrom one transmission area to another.See Alternative frequencies (page 219).
RDS regional
This feature controls the behaviour of AFswitching between regionally relatednetworks of a parent broadcaster. SeeRegional mode (REG) (page 220).
Bluetooth
This feature allows you to switchBluetooth on or off.
Clock settings
Set time
This feature allows you to manually adjustthe time.
198
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
System settings
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 201/266
Set date
This feature allows you to manually adjustthe date, month and year.
GPS time
This feature allows you to, if in a suitablecoverage area, automatically adjust thedate and time using GPS.
Set time zone
This feature allows you select a specifictime zone.
Summertime
This feature allows you set the system toadjust for seasonal time differences.
Note: GPS time must be selected.
24-hour mode
This feature allows you to adjust thesystem between 12 and 24-hour mode.
199
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
System settings
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 202/266
ROUTE OPTIONS MENU
You can set a number of options whichalter the way a route is planned.
Using the up, down, left and right arrowbuttons, you can select from the list whichroad features are to be avoided or includedin the route by turning the feature on or off.
Route
Eco
This option will prioritize the mosteconomical route to the destination.
Fast
This option will prioritize the fastest routeto the destination.
Short
This option will prioritize the shortest routeto the destination..
Always ask
Use this feature to make sure that you arealways given the choice of route typeselection for your journey.
Driver
Leisurely
This option will prioritize the route for aleisurely drive to the destination.
Normal
This option will prioritize the route for anormal drive to the destination.
Fast
This option will prioritize the route for afast drive to the destination.
Eco settings
Trailer
Use this feature to change the economysettings of your journey relating to whetheror not you are towing a trailer and if so thesize of trailer being towed.
Roof box
Use this feature to change the economysettings of your journey relating to the useof a roof box.
Dynamic
When switched on, and if the unit isreceiving a valid traffic message channel(TMC) signal, the route will beautomatically updated to take intoaccount real time traffic incidents orcongestion.
Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.
Motorway
When switched on the system will look forfreeways on your route and automaticallyupdate your route distance and timings.
Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.
Ferry/motorail
When switched on the system will look forferry crossings and motorail facilities onyour route and automatically update your
route distance and timings.
Toll
When switched on the system will look fortoll roads on your route and automaticallyupdate your route distance and timings.
200
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Navigation system
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 203/266
Seasonal roads
When switched on the system will look forseasonal roads on your route and
automatically update your route distanceand timings.
Note: This feature can be useful in avoidingdelays or hold ups on journeys.
Toll sticker
When switched on the system willautomatically select toll roads and updateyour route distance and timings.
ROUTE DISPLAYS
Map display
Press the MAP button for a map view.
This view will show your current locationwith your vehicle in the center shown asan arrow surrounded by a circle. The arrowwill face in the direction of travel.
The information on the top line gives the
name of the current road, or the next roadto take if a turn is approaching.
You can change the way the map isdisplayed by altering the zoom andorientation settings. Press the relevantfunction buttons to change the map scaleand using the left and right arrow buttonszoom in or out. The current map scale isshown on the display.
Map scale settings may be set between50 meters to 500 kilometers or 0.05 milesto 500 miles, with an auto setting to thefar left. The auto setting continuouslychanges the map scale according to theroad type being driven.
Junction zoom
This feature will automatically increasethe zoom on the map display at times
when you are required to make a turn, orperform more complex maneuvres. Shortlyafter the zoom scale will return to theprevious level.
Select AUTO to activate junction zoom.
Navigation display
After commencing a navigation route, thedefault screen is the main navigationscreen:
Once an active route is underway, guidancewill be given by on-screen information andvoice prompts. Whichever audio sourceyou wish to leave the unit in, basic turn byturn and distance information will remainon the screen in the form of a graphic inset.You do not need to leave the unit on themain navigation screen when you arenavigating a route. Slightly more detailedinformation on your route may be availablevia the main navigation screen if required.
WARNING
Do not rely on the screen promptswhen navigating. Always listen to thenavigation voice and take care not
be distracted from the road ahead.
201
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Navigation system
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 204/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Traffic message channel (TMC) stationsare broadcast on the FM waveband. TMCis a feature that receives traffic alertswhich can be used to plan alternativeroutes and avoid hold ups.
USING TMC
Press the TA or TRAFFIC button to showthe traffic menu page.
Traffic announcement
Traffic announcement (TA) can be turnedon or off via this menu. If switched on a TAindicator is shown in the informationborder of the status bar.
Stations which broadcast on the FMwaveband and carry traffic program (TP)information are identified by TP shown inthe screen display. With TA switched onthe unit will respond to theseannouncements and interrupt music
playback. After the announcement hasended music playback will resume.
Ending traffic announcements
The unit will return to normal operation atthe end of each traffic announcement. Toend the announcement prematurely, pressthe TA, TRAFFIC, RADIO or CD buttonduring the announcement.
Using TMC messages
Select the required item to display a list ofTMC messages. See GeneralInformation (page 59). This is only anoverview display which gives very basicinformation. Select the message yourequire further information on and anotherscreen will be displayed giving full messagedetails on incident location etc.
You may either select a view which showsmessages only affecting your programmedroute, or a view which shows all messagesreceived. Press function button 1 to change
the view.
Hazard spot warning (dependingon country)
Note: The availability of this feature willvary from country to country.
The system supports a hazard spotwarning feature which informs you withvisible and audible feedback abouthazardous traffic areas. The system is off
by default. You can switch the system onand off using the information display. SeeInformation Displays (page 59).
202
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Traffic Message Channel
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 205/266
The road network is constantly changingdue to new roads, changes in roadclassification, etc. Therefore, it is notalways possible to exactly match the map
data in the system to the current roadnetwork.
Map information is regularly updated, butall areas are not necessarily covered to thesame level of detail. Some roads, inparticular private roads, may not beincluded on the database. To help withaccuracy, always use the latest versionnavigation disc. Your dealer will be able toprovide this.
203
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Map updates
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 206/266
IMPORTANT AUDIOINFORMATION
WARNINGSDue to technical incompatibility,recordable (CD-R) and rewritable(CD-RW) discs may not function
correctly.
These CD radio units will playcompact discs that conform to theInternational Red Book standard
audio specification. Copy protected CDsfrom some manufacturers do not conformto this standard and playback cannot beguaranteed.
Dual format, dual sided discs (DVDPlus, CD-DVD format), adopted bythe music industry, are thicker than
normal CDs and consequently playbackcannot be guaranteed, and jamming couldoccur. Irregular shaped CDs and CDs witha scratch protection film or self adhesivelabels attached should not be used.Warranty claims, where this type of disc is
found to be inside an audio unit returnedfor repair, will not be accepted.
All CD units are designed to playcommercially pressed 12 cm audiocompact discs only.
The audio unit may be damaged ifunsuitable items like credit cards orcoins are pushed inside the CD
aperture.
Audio unit labels
Disc labels
Audio CD
MP3
204
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio introduction
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 207/266
Note: Units have an integrated multifunction display situated above the CD aperture. This shows important information regarding control of your audio unit.
Additionally, there are various icons placed around the display screen which light upwhen a function is active (for example CD,Radio or Aux.)
Type of audio unit and relevant multifunction display:
Type 0:Base audio without CD
Type 1: Base audio with CD
Type 2: Base display
Type 3: Large display
Type 4: 4.2 inch color display
Type 5: 5 inch NAV color display
Type 0
Volume/menu control.A
LCD display.B
Seek down (long press). Manualtune down (short press). SeeStation tuning control (page216).
C
Display time/date and RDSinformation.
D
On/off (long press) and mute(short press).
E
Seek up (long press). Manualtune up (short press). SeeStation tuning control (page
216).
F
Audio mode select. See Audiounit operation (page 216). SeeAuxiliary Power Points (page79). See Auxiliary input jack(page 226).
G
Scan and auto store.H
Station preset 6. See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).
I
Station preset 5. See Station
preset buttons (page 217).
J
Station preset 4. See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).
K
Station preset 3. See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).
L
Station preset 2. See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).
M
Station preset 1. See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).
N
Menu back.O
Type 1
CD eject. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).
A
Volume/menu control.B
205
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 208/266
CD Aperture.C
LCD display.D
Seek down. CD trackselect/Fast-rewind. SeeStation tuning control (page216). See Track selection (page221).
E
Display time/date and RDSinformation.
F
On/off (long press) and mute(short press).
G
Seek up. CD track
select/Fast-forward. SeeStation tuning control (page216). See Track selection (page221).
H
Radio and waveband select. SeeAudio unit operation (page216).
I
Scan and auto store.J
Station preset 6. Shuffle. SeeStation preset buttons (page217).
K
Station preset 5. Repeat. SeeStation preset buttons (page217).
L
Station preset 4. Next folder.See Station preset buttons(page 217).
M
Station preset 3. Previous folder.See Station preset buttons(page 217).
N
Station preset 2. Scroll display.
See Station preset buttons(page 217).
O
Station preset 1. Menu back. SeeStation preset buttons (page217).
P
Select CD/Auxiliary. SeeCompact Disc Player (page221). See Auxiliary PowerPoints (page 79). SeeAuxiliary input jack (page 226).
Q
206
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 209/266
Type 2
CD eject. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).
A
CD select. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).
B
Seek down. CD track selection.See Station tuning control(page 216). See Track selection(page 221).
C
On/off and volume control.D
Seek up. CD track selection. SeeStation tuning control (page216). See Track selection (page221).
E
Station presets. See Stationpreset buttons (page 217).
F
Menu select.G
Information.H
Navigation arrows.ITraffic announcement. SeeTraffic information control(page 218).
J
Door lock indicator.K
Hazard warning flasher switch.L
Door lock button. See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).
M
207
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 210/266
Menu entry/exit.N
Sound button. See Soundbutton (page 216).
O
Auxiliary select. See Auxiliary Power Points (page 79). SeeAuxiliary input jack (page 226).
P
Radio and waveband select. SeeAudio unit operation (page216).
Q
Type 3 and Type 4
Descriptions for function buttons1-4
A
208
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 211/266
Function 1.A
Function 2.B
Seek down. CD track selection.See Station tuning control(page 216). See Track selection(page 221).
C
On/off and volume control.D
Seek up. CD track selection. SeeStation tuning control (page216). See Track selection (page221).
E
Function 3.F
Function 4.G
Menu select.H
Telephone keypad and stationpresets. See Using thetelephone (page 231). SeeStation preset buttons (page217).
I
Navigation arrows.J
Traffic announcement. SeeTraffic information control(page 218).
K
Information.L
Door lock indicator.M
Hazard warning flasher switch.N
Door lock button. See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).
O
209
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 212/266
Sound button. See Soundbutton (page 216).
P
Menu entry/exit.Q
Phone menu. See Telephone(page 229).
R
Auxiliary, USB and iPod select.See Auxiliary Power Points(page 79). See Auxiliary inputjack (page 226).
S
Radio and waveband select. SeeAudio unit operation (page216).
T
CD eject. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).U
CD select. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).
V
Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for thefunctions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.
Type 5
Descriptions for function buttons1-4
A
210
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 213/266
Function 1.A
Function 2.B
Seek down. CD track selection.See Station tuning control(page 216). See Track selection(page 221).
C
On/off and volume control.D
Seek up. CD track selection. SeeStation tuning control (page216). See Track selection (page221).
E
Function 3.F
Function 4.G
Menu select.H
Telephone keypad, stationpresets and navigation keypad.See Using the telephone (page231). See Station presetbuttons (page 217). SeeNavigation Quick start (page193).
I
Clock.JTraffic announcement. SeeTraffic information control(page 218).
K
Navigation arrows.L
Map.M
Information.N
Door lock indicator.O
211
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 214/266
Hazard warning flasher switch.P
Door lock button. See Lockingand Unlocking (page 36).
Q
Navigation.R
Menu entry/exit.S
Phone menu. See Telephone(page 229).
T
Auxiliary, USB and iPod select.See Auxiliary Power Points(page 79). See Auxiliary inputjack (page 226).
U
Radio and waveband select. See
Audio unit operation (page216).
V
CD eject. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).
W
CD select. See Compact DiscPlayer (page 221).
X
Function buttons 1 to 4 are contextdependent, and change according to thecurrent unit mode. Descriptions for the
functions are shown at the bottom of thescreen display.
212
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit overview
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 215/266
SECURITY CODE
Each unit incorporates a unique code thatis needed to activate the audio systemwhen the vehicle battery has beendisconnected and reconnected. The 4 digitcode is included in the owner informationpack.
If the security code is not available, pleasesee your dealer.
Entering a security code
If ‘CODE - - - -’, ‘CODE 0000’ or ‘EnterKeycode’ appears in the display when you
switch on the audio unit, you must enterthe Keycode using the station presetbuttons.
Type 0, 1 and 2
1. Press button 1 repeatedly until the firstdigit of your Keycode is shown in thedisplay.
2. Press preset buttons 2, 3 and 4 in thesame way for remaining three digits.
3. Make sure that the complete Keycodeis correct before pressing preset button5 to confirm it except 1500RDS pressthe AM/FM button.
Type 3, 4 and 5
1. Press the numbered buttoncorresponding to the first digit of yourKeycode.
2. Press the numbered button
corresponding to the second digit ofyour Keycode. Repeat for digits 3 and4 in the same way.
3. If you make a mistake entering thecode, you may re-enter the digits bycontinuing to select buttons 0-9. Thedisplay will advance from digit position1 to 4 and then back again.
4. Make sure that the complete Keycodeis correct before pressing either the *preset button or the button betweenthe arrow buttons to confirm it.
213
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio System Security
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 216/266
SETTING THE CLOCK ON THEAUDIO UNIT
Changing the timeThe clock can be set at any time when thesystem is in the one hour mode or theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Note: Type 2 and 3: The time can be adjusted using the hour and minute buttonson the screen.
To advance the hours, press the HOUR SETbutton. To advance the minutes, press theMINUTE SET button while the time is
flashing.
Note: Type 5: The time can be adjusted using the clock button on the audio control panel. See Audio unit overview (page 205).
Note: The time can be adjusted using the navigation arrow buttons on the audiocontrol panel.
Type 0 and 1
• Press the MENU button.
• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to selectthe date/time.
• Short press the MENU button to enterdate/time.
• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to selectthe hour set and enter.
• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to adjustthe hours.
• Press BACK button to return toprevious menu.
• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to selectminute set and enter.
• Rotate the MENU CONTROL to adjustminutes.
• Press MENU button to save the newsettings.
Type 2, 4 and 5
• Press the MENU button.
• Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttons
to select the clock settings.• Press OK or RIGHT arrow button to
enter clock settings.
• Use UP and DOWN arrow button toselect the set time.
• Use UP and DOWN arrow buttons toadjust hours.
• Use RIGHT and LEFT arrow buttons toscroll to the minutes.
• Use UP and DOWN arrow buttons to
adjust minutes.
• Press OK button to save the newsettings
Type 3
• Press the MENU button.
• Use the UP and DOWN arrow buttonsto select the clock.
• Press OK or RIGHT arrow button toenter clock menu.
• Use UP and DOWN arrow button toselect the set time.
• Use UP and DOWN arrow buttons toadjust hours.
• Use RIGHT and LEFT arrow buttons toscroll to the minutes.
• Use UP and DOWN arrow buttons toadjust minutes.
• Press OK button to save the newsettings
Exact hour adjustment
You can set the time to the beginning ofan hour using this feature.
• Press the CLOCK button for about twoseconds until a beep is heard. Theclock's current time will flash.
• Press the CLOCK button again and thetime will be adjusted as follows:
214
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 217/266
Example
• current set time between 12:01 and12:29 will change to 12:00 exactly
• current set time between 12:30 and12:59 will change to 1:00 exactly.
Note: If the power supply to the unit isinterrupted (if the fuse blows or the vehicle's battery is disconnected), the clock will need to be reset.
215
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio Unit Clock and Date Displays
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 218/266
ON/OFF CONTROL
Press the on/off control. This will alsooperate the unit for up to one hour with theignition turned off.
The radio will switch off automaticallyafter one hour.
SOUND BUTTON
This will allow you to adjust the soundsettings (for example bass and treble).
1. Press the sound button.
2. Use the up and down arrow buttons toselect the required setting.
3. Use the left and right arrow buttons tomake the necessary adjustment. Thedisplay indicates the level selected.
4. Press the OK button to confirm thenew settings.
WAVEBAND BUTTON
Press the RADIO button to select from thewavebands available.
The selector can also be used to return toradio reception when you have beenlistening to another source.
Alternatively, press the left arrow buttonto display the available wavebands. Scrollto the required waveband and press OK.
STATION TUNING CONTROLSeek tuning
Select a waveband and briefly press oneof the seek buttons. The unit will stop atthe first station it finds in the direction youhave chosen.
Manual tuning
Type 0 and 1
1. Make sure FM/AM mode is active andthen MANUAL TUNE.
2. Use the seek buttons to tune down orup the waveband in small incrementsor press and hold to increment quickly,until you find a station you want tolisten to.
Type 2
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select RADIO mode and then MANUALTUNE.
3. Use the left and right arrow buttons totune down or up the waveband in smallincrements or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.
4. Press OK to continue listening to astation.
Type 3, 4 and 5
1. Press function button 2.
2. Use the left and right arrow buttons totune down or up the waveband in smallincrements or press and hold toincrement quickly, until you find astation you want to listen to.
3. Press OK to continue listening to astation.
Scan tuning
Scan allows you to listen to 8 seconds ofeach station detected.
Type 0 and 1
1. Press the FM/AM button.
2. Short press the SCAN/AS button, theradio will automatically scan up theselected waveband.
216
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit operation
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 219/266
3. Short press the SCAN/AS button againto continue listening to a station.
Type 2
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select RADIO mode and then SCAN.
3. Use the seek buttons to scan up ordown the selected waveband.
4. Press OK to continue listening to astation.
Type 3, 4 and 5
1. Press function button 3.
2. Use the seek buttons to scan up ordown the selected waveband.
3. Press function button 3 again or OK tocontinue listening to a station.
STATION PRESET BUTTONS
This feature allows you to store yourfavorite stations so that they can berecalled by selecting the appropriate
waveband and pressing one of the presetbuttons.
Type 0 and 1
1. Select a waveband.
2. Tune to the station required.
3. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenthe station has been stored, the presetnumber along with the station name
or frequency is displayed forconfirmation.
Type 2, 3, 4 and 5
1. Select a waveband.
2. Tune to the station required.
3. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons. A progress bar and messagewill appear. When the progress barcompletes the station has been stored.
The audio unit will also mutemomentarily as confirmation.
This can be repeated on each wavebandand for each preset button.
Note: When you drive to another part of thecountry, FM stations that broadcast on alternative frequencies, and are stored on preset buttons, may be updated with thecorrect frequency and station name for that area.
AUTOSTORE CONTROL
Note: This will store the strongest signals available, either from the AM or the FMwaveband, and overwrite the previously stored stations. It can also be used to store stations manually in the same way as other wavebands.
Type 0 and 11. In RADIO mode, long press the
SCAN/AS button.
2. When the search is complete, sound isrestored and the strongest 6 stationsare stored on the Autostore presets.
Type 2, 3, 4 and 5
1. Press and hold function button 1 or theRADIO button.
2. When the search is complete, sound isrestored and the strongest 10 stationsare stored on the Autostore presets.
217
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit operation
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 220/266
TRAFFIC INFORMATIONCONTROL
Many stations that broadcast on the FMwaveband have a TP code to signify thatthey carry traffic program information.
Activating traffic announcements
Before you can receive trafficannouncements, you must press either theTA or TRAFFIC button. A ‘TA’ display willappear to show the feature is switched on.
If you are already tuned to a station that
broadcasts traffic information,‘TP
’ willalso be displayed. Otherwise the unit will
search for a traffic program.
When traffic information is broadcast, itwill automatically interrupt normal radioor CD playback and ‘Traffic announcement(TA)’ will appear in the display.
If a non-traffic station is selected orrecalled using a preset button, the audiounit will remain on that station unless TAor TRAFFIC is turned off, then on again.
Note: If TA is on and you select a preset or manual tune to a non TA station no traffic announcement will be heard.
Note: When you are listening to a non TA station and turn TA off and on again a TP seek will occur.
Traffic announcement volume
Traffic announcements interrupt normalbroadcasts at a preset minimum level thatis usually louder than normal listeningvolumes.
To adjust the preset volume:
• Use the volume control to make thenecessary adjustment during anincoming TA broadcast. The displaywill show the level selected.
Ending traffic announcements
The audio unit will return to normaloperation at the end of each traffic
announcement. To end the announcementprematurely, press TA or TRAFFIC duringthe announcement.
Note: If you press TA or TRAFFIC at any other time it will switch all announcementsoff.
218
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit operation
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 221/266
AUTOMATIC VOLUMECONTROL
When available, automatic volume control(AVC) adjusts the volume level tocompensate for engine noise and roadspeed noise.
1. Press the MENU button and selectAUDIO.
2. Select AVC LEVEL or ADAPTIVE VOL.
3. Use the left or right arrow button toadjust the setting.
4. Press the OK button to confirm your
selection.5. Press the MENU button to return.
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING(DSP)
DSP occupancy
This feature takes into account thedifferences in distance from the various
speakers in the vehicle to each seat. Selectthe sitting position for which the audio isto be correctly enhanced.
DSP equalizer
Select the music category that most suitsyour listening preference. The audio outputwill change to enhance the particular styleof music chosen.
Changing the DSP settings
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
3. Scroll to the required DSP function.
4. Use the up and down arrow buttons toselect the required setting.
5. Press the OK button to confirm yourselection.
6. Press the MENU button to return.
NEWS BROADCASTS
Some audio units interrupt normalreception to broadcast news bulletins fromstations on the FM waveband or radio datasystem (RDS) and enhanced othernetwork (EON) linked stations, in the sameway as traffic information is provided.
During news broadcasts, the display willindicate there is an incomingannouncement. News interrupts arebroadcast at the same preset volume levelas traffic announcements.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
3. Scroll to NEWS and turn on or off withthe OK button.
4. Press the MENU button to return.
ALTERNATIVE FREQUENCIES
Many programs that broadcast on the FMwaveband have a program identification
(PI) code, which can be recognized byaudio units.
If your radio has alternative frequencies(AF) tuning switched on and you movefrom one transmission area to another, thisfacility will search for and switch to astronger station signal, if one can be found.
Under certain conditions, however, AFtuning may temporarily disrupt normalreception.
When selected, the unit continuallyevaluates signal strength and, if a bettersignal becomes available, the unit willswitch to that alternative. It mutes whileit checks a list of alternative frequenciesand, if necessary, it will search once acrossthe selected waveband for a genuinealternative frequency.
219
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit menus
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 222/266
It will restore radio reception when it findsone or, if one is not found, the unit willreturn to the original stored frequency.
When selected,‘AF
’ will be shown in thedisplay.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO MENU.
3. Scroll to ALTERNAT FREQ. orALTERNATIVE FREQ. and turn on or offwith the OK button.
4. Press the MENU button to return.
REGIONAL MODE (REG)Regional mode (REG) controls thebehavior of AF switching betweenregionally related networks of a parentbroadcaster. A broadcaster may run a fairlylarge network across a large part of thecountry. At various times of the day thislarge network may be broken down into anumber of smaller regional networks,typically centered on major towns or cities.When the network is not split into regionalvariants, the whole network caries thesame programming.
Regional mode ON: This prevents 'random'AF switches when neighboring regionalnetworks are not carrying the sameprogramming.
Regional mode OFF: This allows a largercoverage area if neighboring regionalnetworks are carrying the sameprogramming, but can cause 'random' AF
switches if they are not.1. Press the MENU button.
2. Select AUDIO or AUDIO SETTINGS.
3. Scroll to RDS REGIONAL and turn onor off with the OK button.
4. Press the MENU button to return.
220
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio unit menus
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 223/266
COMPACT DISC PLAYBACK
Note: During playback, the display indicatesthe disc, track and time that has elapsed since the start of the track.
During radio reception, press the CD buttononce to start CD playback.
Playback will start immediately after a discis loaded.
TRACK SELECTION
• Press the seek up button once to move
to the next track or press it repeatedlyto access later tracks.
• Press the seek down button once toreplay the current track. If pressedwithin two seconds of the start of atrack, the previous track will beselected.
• Press the seek down button repeatedlyto select previous tracks.
Type 2, 3, 4 and 5
• Press the up or down arrow buttons,and using the OK button, select therequired track.
Type 3, 4 and 5
The desired track number may be enteredusing the numeric keypad. Dial the requiredtrack number until complete (for example1 then 2 for track 12), or dial the numberand directly press OK.
FAST FORWARD/REVERSE
Press and hold the seek down or upbuttons to search backwards or forwardswithin the tracks on the disc.
SHUFFLE/RANDOM
Random track playback, also known asshuffle, plays all tracks on the CD inrandom order.
Type 1
1. Press the SHUFFLE button in CD mode.
When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or toplay all the tracks in the folder in a randomorder.
Type 2
1. Press the MENU button and select CDMODE.
2. Select SHUFFLE, which then enablesthe function to be selected on or off.
When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or toplay all the tracks in the folder in a randomorder.
Type 3, 4 and 5
Press function button 2.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SHUFFLE for the whole CD, or to play all the tracks in the folder in a randomorder. Repeat presses of function button 2will toggle these options.
Use the seek up or down button to selectthe next track to shuffle if required.
REPEAT COMPACT DISCTRACKS
Type 1
1. Press REPEAT button in CD mode.
When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude REPEAT for the track, or to repeatall the tracks in the folder.
221
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Compact Disc Player
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 224/266
Type 2
1. Press the MENU button and select CDMODE.
2. Select REPEAT, which then enablesthe function to be selected on or off.The track will replay once ended.
When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude REPEAT for the track, or to repeatall the tracks in the folder.
Type 3, 4 and 5
Press function button 1.
When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude REPEAT for the track, or to repeatall the tracks in the folder. Repeat pressesof function button 1 will toggle theseoptions.
COMPACT DISC TRACKSCANNING
The SCAN function allows you to previeweach track for approximately 8 seconds.
Type 1
1. Press CD/AUX to select CD MODE.
2. Short press SCAN/AS button toactivate CD scanning.
3. Short press the SCAN/AS button againto continue listening to a track.
Type 2
Various scan modes are possible,according to the type of CD currentlyplaying.
1. Press the MENU button and select CDMODE.
2. Select SCAN, which then enables thefunction to be selected on or off.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SCAN for the CD, or just the tracksin the folder.
3. Press the OK button to stop the scanmode.
Type 3, 4 and 5
1. Press function button 3.
Note: When an MP3 CD is playing, optionsinclude SCAN for the CD, or just the tracksin the folder. Repeat presses of function button 3 will toggle these options.
2. Press function button 3 again to stop
the scan mode.
MP3 FILE PLAYBACK
MP3 (MPEG 1 Audio Layer-3) is a standardtechnology and format for compressingaudio data. This allows a more efficientuse of the media.
You can play MP3 files recorded onCD-ROMs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs. The disc
must be in the ISO 9660 level 1 or level 2format, or Joliet or Romeo in the expansionformat. You can also use a disc recordedin Multi Session.
ISO 9660 format
This is the most common internationalstandard for the logical format of files andfolders on a CD-ROM.
There are several specification levels. InLevel 1, file names must be in the 8.3format (no more than 8 characters in thename, no more than 3 characters in theextension “.MP3”) and in capital letters.
Folder names can be no longer than 8characters. There can be no more than 8folder levels (trees). Level 2 specificationsallow file names up to 31 characters long.
Each folder can have up to 8 trees.
222
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Compact Disc Player
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 225/266
For Joliet or Romeo in the expansionformat, please consider these restrictionswhen configuring your CD writing software.
Multi sessionThis is a recording method that enablesadding of data using the Track-At-Oncemethod.
Conventional CDs begin at a CD controlarea called the Lead-in and end at an areacalled Lead-out. A Multi Session CD is aCD having multiple sessions, with eachsegment from Lead-in to Lead-outregarded as a single session.
• CD-Extra: The format that recordsaudio (audio CD data) as tracks onsession 1, and records data as trackson session 2.
• Mixed CD: In this format, data isrecorded as track 1, and audio (audioCD data) is recorded as track 2.
File formats
• With formats other than ISO 9660
level 1 and level 2, folder names or filenames may not be displayed correctly.
• When naming, be sure to add the fileextension “.MP3” to the file name.
• If you put the extension “.MP3” to a fileother than MP3, the unit cannotrecognize the file properly and willgenerate random noise that coulddamage your speakers.
• The following discs take a longer time
to start playback.• a disc recorded with complicated
tree structure.
• a disc recorded in Multi Session.
• a non-finalized disc to which datacan be added.
Playing a multi session disc
When the first track of the first sessionis audio CD data
Only audio CD data of the first session isplayed back. Non-audio CD data/MP3 fileinformation (track number, time, etc.) isdisplayed with no sound.
When the first track of the first sessionis not audio CD data
• If an MP3 file is in the disc, only MP3file(s) play back and other data isskipped. (Audio CD data is notrecognized.)
• If no MP3 file is in the disc, nothing isplayed back. (Audio CD data is notrecognized.)
MP3 files playback order
The playback order of the folders and filesis as shown.
Note: A folder that does not include an MP3file is skipped.
Playback tip: To specify a desiredplayback order, before the folder or filename, input the order by number (e.g.,“01,”“02”), then record contents onto a disc.(The order differs depending on the writingsoftware.)
223
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Compact Disc Player
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 226/266
ID3 Tag Version 2
The following occurs when an MP3 filecontaining ID3 tag ver.2 is played:
• When skipping a portion of ID3 tag ver.2(at the beginning of the track), soundis not output. Skip time changesdepending ID3 tag ver.2 capacity.Example: At 64 kbytes, it is about 2seconds (with RealJukebox).
• The displayed elapsed playing timewhen skipping a portion of ID3 tag ver.2is inaccurate. For MP3 files of a bit rateother than 128 kbps, time is notdisplayed accurately during playback.
• When an MP3 file is created with MP3conversion software (e.g. RealJukebox
- a registered trademark ofRealNetworks Inc), ID3 ver.2 willautomatically be written.
MP3 navigation
MP3 tracks may be recorded on the CD inseveral ways. They can all be placed in the
root directory like a conventional audio CD,or they can be placed in folders that mayrepresent, for example, an album, an artist,or a genre.
The normal playing sequence on CDs withmultiple folders is to play the tracks withinthe root (top level) first, then the tracks inany folder(s) within the root, then moveonto the second folder, and so forth.
• Press the up or down arrow buttons to
enter the track list.• Navigate the hierarchy using the arrow
buttons to select another folder ortrack (file).
• Press OK to select a highlighted track.
MP3 DISPLAY OPTIONS
Note: Type 1 units may require repeated button presses of the INFO button to display
all the available track information.When an MP3 disc is playing, certaininformation encoded in each track can bedisplayed. Such information will normallyinclude:
• The file name
• The folder name
• ID3 information which might be thealbum or artist’s name
The unit will normally show the file namethat is playing. To select one of the otheritems of information:
• Press the INFO button.
CD text display options
When an audio disc with CD text is playing,limited information encoded in each trackcan be displayed. Such information willnormally include:
224
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Compact Disc Player
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 227/266
• The disc name
• The artist name
• The track name
These display options are selected in thesame way as MP3 displays.
ENDING COMPACT DISCPLAYBACK
To restore radio reception on all units:
• Press the RADIO button.
Note: This will not eject the CD; the disc
will merely pause at the point where radio reception was restored.
To resume CD playback, press the CDbutton again.
225
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Compact Disc Player
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 228/266
Note: For optimum performance whenusing any auxiliary device set the volume onthe device high. This will reduce audiointerference when charging the device via
the vehicle power supply socket.
When fitted the Auxiliary input (AUX IN)socket permits an auxiliary device, such asan MP3 player, to be linked into the vehicleaudio system. Output can be playedthrough the vehicle speakers.
To connect an auxiliary device, plug it intothe AUX IN socket using a 3.5 mmconventional audio jack connector.
Select the auxiliary input via the AUX orMENU button and playback will be heardthrough the vehicle speakers. LINE IN orLINE IN ACTIVE will appear in the vehicleaudio unit display. Volume, treble and basscan be adjusted on the vehicle audio unitas normal.
The vehicle audio unit buttons can also beused to restore playback from the vehicleaudio unit, while the auxiliary deviceremains connected.
226
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Auxiliary input jack
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 229/266
ANTENNA
The radio aerial is mounted on the roof ofthe vehicle above the interior rear viewmirror. It is fixed and cannot be raised andlowered, however the assembly can beremoved by unscrewing from the base.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the aerial,remove it before entering a car washor passing beneath a low overhead
clearance.
227
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio system care
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 230/266
AUDIO TROUBLESHOOTING
RectificationAudio unit display
General error message for CD fault conditions, such ascannot read the CD, data-CD inserted, etc. Ensure discis loaded correct way up. Clean and re-try, or replace
disc with known music disc. If error persists contact yourdealer.
PLEASE CHECK CD
General error message for CD fault conditions such aspossible mechanism fault.
CD DRIVE MALFUNCTION
Ambient temperature too hot – unit will not work untilit has cooled down.
CD DRIVE HIGH TEMP
General error message for iPod fault conditions, suchas cannot read the data. Ensure iPod is inserted
correctly. If error persists contact your dealer.
IPOD ERROR READING DEVICE
228
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Audio Troubleshooting
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 231/266
GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTION
Using the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.
This section describes the functions andfeatures of the Bluetooth cell phone handsfree system.
The Bluetooth cell phone part of thesystem provides interaction with the audioor navigation system and your cell phone.It allows you to use the audio or navigation
system to make and receive calls withouthaving to hold your cell phone.
Compatibility of phones
CAUTION
As no common agreement exists, cellphone manufacturers are able toimplement a variety of profiles in their
Bluetooth devices. Because of this, anincompatibility can occur between the
phone and hands-free system, which insome cases may significantly degrade thesystem performance. To avoid thissituation, only recommended phonesshould be used.
Please visit the website www.ford-mobile-connectivity.com for full details.
TELEPHONE SETUP
PhonebookAfter start up access to the phonebook listcan be delayed for several minutes,depending upon the size.
Phonebook categories
Depending on your phonebook entry,different categories can be displayed inthe audio unit.
For example:
MobileM
OfficeO
HomeH
FaxF
Note: Entries may be displayed without acategory attachment.
The category can also be indicated as anicon:
Phone
Mobile
Home
Office
Fax
Making a phone an active phone
When using the system for the first time,no phone is connected to the system.
Bluetooth phone
After bonding a Bluetooth phone to thesystem, this becomes the active phone.For further information refer to the phonemenu.
Select the phone from the active phonemenu.
Turning the ignition and radio or navigationunit back on again, the last active phoneis picked up by the system.
229
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Telephone
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 232/266
Note: In some cases the Bluetoothconnection must also be confirmed on the phone.
Bond another Bluetooth phoneBond a new Bluetooth phone as describedin the requirements for a Bluetoothconnection.
Phones stored in the system are accessibleby using the phone list on the audio unit.
Note: A maximum of six devices may be bonded. If six Bluetooth devices have already been bonded, one of these has to be debonded in order to bond a new device.
BLUETOOTH SETUP
Before you can use your telephone withyour vehicle it must be bonded to thevehicle telephone system.
Handling of phones
Up to six Bluetooth devices can be bondedto the vehicle system.
Note: If there is an ongoing call when the phone in use is selected as the new active phone, the call is transferred to the vehicle audio system.
Note: Even if connected to the car system, your phone can still be used in the usualway.
Requirements for Bluetoothconnection
The following are required before aBluetooth phone connection can be made.
1. The Bluetooth feature must beactivated on the phone and on theaudio unit. Make sure the Bluetoothmenu option in the audio unit is set to
ON. For information on phone settings,refer to your phone user guide.
2. In the Bluetooth menu on your phone,search for Ford Audio and select it.
3. Enter the code number shown on thevehicle display using the phone keypad.If no code number is shown on thedisplay, enter the Bluetooth PINnumber 0000 using the phone keypad.Now enter the Bluetooth PIN number
shown on the vehicle display.4. If your cell phone asks you to authorize
the automatic connection, select YES.
Note: A phone call will be disconnected if the audio unit is switched off. If the ignition key is turned to the off position the phonecall will remain in progress.
230
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Telephone
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 233/266
TELEPHONE CONTROLS
Remote control
Accept and reject call button
Reject callA
Accept callB
Incoming calls can be accepted by pressingthe answer call button once. Press thereject call button to end the call or to rejectthe incoming call.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Note: You can exit the phone menu by pressing any source button CD , RADIO or AUX .
Note: When referred to, the use of the seekup and seek down buttons can be used oneither the steering wheel or the audio unit.
This chapter describes the phone functionsof the audio unit.
An active phone must be present.
Even if connected to the audio unit, yourphone can still be used in the usual way.
Making a call
Dialing a number using voice control
Phone numbers can be dialed using voicecontrol. See Telephone commands(page 243).
Dialing a number using the addressbook
You can access your phone address bookvia Bluetooth. The entries will appear inthe unit display.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the up/down arrow buttons untilPHONEBOOK is shown.
3. Press the OK button.
Note: You can also use the telephone keypad to select the first letter of the entry you are looking for. Press the relevant number that corresponds to the letter repeatedly until the required letter isdisplayed.
4. Press the up/down arrow buttons to
select the desired phone number.Note: Press and hold the up/down arrow buttons to search forwards or backwardswithin the phonebook.
5. Press the OK button to dial theselected phone number.
Dialing a number using the telephonekeypad
If you have an audio unit with a telephone
keypad (buttons 0-9, * and #):1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the up/down arrow buttons untilDIAL NUMBER is shown.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Dial the number using the telephonekeypad on the audio unit.
5. Press the OK button.
231
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Telephone
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 234/266
Note: If you enter an incorrect digit whilstentering a phone number, press function button 3 to erase the last digit. A long presswill erase the complete string of digits.
Press and hold 0 to enter a + digit.
Ending a call
Calls can be ended by:
• Pressing the reject call button.
• Pressing the OK button.
• Pressing function button 4.
Redialing a number
1. Press the PHONE or the answer callbutton.
2. Press the up/down arrow buttons untilCALL LISTS is displayed.
3. Press the OK button.
Note: If the active phone does not provide a call out list, the last outgoing call number/entry can be redialed.
4. Press the up/down buttons to select
the desired call list.5. Press the OK button.
6. Press the up/down buttons to selectthe desired phone number.
7. Press the OK button.
Redialing the last dialed number
1. Press the PHONE or the answer callbutton.
2. Press the up/down arrow buttons until
REDIAL is displayed.
3. Press the OK button.
Receiving an incoming call
Accepting an incoming call
Incoming calls can be accepted by pressingthe answer call button, or by pressing theOK button.
Rejecting an incoming call
Incoming calls can be rejected by:
• Pressing the reject call button, or
• Pressing the arrow down button tohighlight REJECT and then pressingthe OK button.
Receiving a second incoming call
Note: The second incoming call function must be activated in your phone.
If there is an incoming call whilst there isan ongoing call, a beep will be heard andyou will have the option to end the active
call and to accept the incoming call.
Accepting a second incoming call
Note: The first incoming call will bedisconnected and replaced by the second incoming call.
Second incoming calls can be acceptedby pressing the answer call button on thesteering wheel, the PHONE button, or bypressing the OK button on the audio unit.
Rejecting a second incoming call
Second incoming calls can be rejected by:
• Pressing the reject call button.
• Pressing the arrow down button tohighlight REJECT and then pressingthe OK button.
• Pressing function button 4.
Muting the microphone
Note: During a call, it is possible to mutethe microphone. Whilst muted, confirmationwill appear in the display.
Press function button 1. Press the buttononce again to turn this function off.
Changing the active phone
Note: Phones must be bonded to the system before they can be made active.
232
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Telephone
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 235/266
Note: After bonding a phone to the system,this becomes the active phone.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the up/down buttons untilSELECT PHONE is shown.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Scroll through the different storedphones by using the up/down buttonsto display the bonded phones.
5. Press the OK button to select thephone which is to be the active phone.
Debonding a bonded phone
A bonded phone can be deleted from thesystem at any time, unless a phone call isin progress.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Press the up/down buttons untilSELECT PHONE is shown.
3. Press the OK button.
4. Press the up/down buttons to highlightthe required phone.
5. Press function button 1.
233
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Telephone
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 236/266
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
CAUTION
Using the system with the engine offwill drain the battery.
Voice recognition enables operation of thesystem without the need to divert yourattention from the road ahead in order tochange settings, or receive feedback fromthe system.
Whenever you issue one of the definedcommands with the system active, the
voice recognition system converts yourcommand into a control signal for thesystem. Your inputs take the form ofdialogues or commands. You are guidedthrough these dialogues byannouncements or questions.
Please familiarize yourself with thefunctions of the system before using voicerecognition.
Supported commands
The voice control system allows you tocontrol the following vehicle functions:
• Bluetooth phone
• radio
• CD Player
• external device (USB)
• external device (iPod)
• external device (Line in)
• external device (Bluetooth)
• automatic climate control
System response
As you work through a voice session thesystem will prompt you with a beep toneeach time the system is ready to proceed.
Do not try to give any commands until thebeep tone has been heard. The voicecontrol system will repeat each spokencommand back to you.
If you are not sure how to continue say"HELP" for assistance or "CANCEL" if youdo not wish to continue.
The "HELP" function provides only asubset of the available voice commands.Detailed explanations of all possible voicecommands can be found on the followingpages.
Voice commands
All voice commands should be given usinga natural speaking voice, as if speaking toa passenger or on the phone. Your voicelevel should be dependant on thesurrounding noise level inside or outsidethe vehicle but do not shout.
USING VOICE CONTROL
System operation
The order and content of the voice controlsare given in the following lists. The tablesshow the sequence of user voicecommands and system responses for eachavailable function.
<> indicates a number or stored name tagto be inserted by the user.
Short cuts
There are a number of voice command
short cuts available, which allow you tocontrol some vehicle features withouthaving to follow the complete commandmenu. These are:
• phone: "MOBILE NAME", "DIALNUMBER", "DIAL NAME", and "REDIAL"
• CD player/CD changer: "DISC" and"TRACK"
234
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 237/266
• automatic climate control:"TEMPERATURE", "AUTO MODE","DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON" and"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"
• radio: "TUNE NAME"
• external device (USB): "TRACK"
• external device (iPod): "TRACK"
Start communicating with the system
Before you can start talking to the systemyou first have to press the VOICE buttonfor each operation and wait until thesystem answers with a beep. See VoiceControl (page 40).
Press the button again to cancel the voicesession.
Name tag
The name tag functionality can supportthe phone, audio and navigation featuresby using the "STORE NAME" function. Youcan assign name tags to items such asfavorite radio stations and personal phonecontacts. See Audio unit commands
(page 235). See Telephone commands(page 243).
• Store up to 20 name tags per function.
• The average recording time for eachname tag is approximately 2-3
seconds.
AUDIO UNIT COMMANDS
CD Player
You can control playback directly by voicecontrol.
Overview
The overview below shows the available
voice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"CD PLAYER"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"*
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE FOLDER"**
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT FOLDER"**
235
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 238/266
"CD PLAYER"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Only available if the CD contains audio data files like MP3 or WMA.
Track
You can choose a track on your CD directly.
System answerUser saysSteps
"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"*2
"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"**3
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)
Shuffle all
To set random playback.
System answerUser saysSteps
"CD PLAYER""CD PLAYER"1
"SHUFFLE ALL"2
RadioThe radio voice commands support thefunctionality of the radio and allow you totune radio stations by voice control.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu.
236
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 239/266
"RADIO"
"HELP"
"AM"
"FM"
"TUNE NAME"*
"DELETE NAME"
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
"STORE NAME"
"PLAY"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Tune frequency
This function allows you to tune your radioby voice commands.
System answerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"AM FREQUENCY PLEASE""AM"2
"FM FREQUENCY PLEASE""FM"
"TUNE <frequency>""<frequency>"*3
* The frequency may be entered in a variety of ways. Refer below for representativeexamples.
FM band: 87.5 - 108.0 in increments of 0.1
• "Eighty nine point nine" (89.9)
• "Ninety" (90.0)
• "One hundred point five" (100.5)
• "One zero one point one" (101.1)
• "One zero eight" (108.0)
AM/MW band: 531 - 1602 in increments of9
AM/LW band: 153 - 281 in increments of 1
• "Five thirty one" (531)
• "Nine hundred" (900)
• "Fourteen forty" (1440)
237
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 240/266
• "Fifteen zero three" (1503)
• "Ten eighty" (1080)
Store name
If you have tuned a radio station, you canstore it with a name in the directory.
System answerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"
"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3
"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED"
Tune name
This function allows you to call up a storedradio station.
System answerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"NAME PLEASE""TUNE NAME"*2
"TUNE <name>""<name>"3
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Delete name
This function allows you to delete a storedradio station.
System answerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2
"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"DELETED""YES"4
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
238
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 241/266
Play directory This function allows you to let the systemtell you all of the stored radio stations.
System answerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"PLAY <DIRECTORY>""PLAY DIRECTORY"2
Delete directory
This function allows you to delete allstored radio stations at once.
System answerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"RADIO DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
Play
This function switches the audio source tothe radio mode.
System answerUser saysSteps
"RADIO""RADIO"1
"PLAY"2
Auxiliary inputThis function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached auxiliary inputdevice.
System answerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1
"LINE IN""LINE IN"2
239
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 242/266
External devices - USB
These voice commands support thefunctionality of an external USB device
which may be connected to the audio unit.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists will
give further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "USB"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"*
"PLAYLIST"**
"FOLDER"**
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE FOLDER"
"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT FOLDER"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Playlists and folders activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.
USB play
This function allows you to switch theaudio source to the attached USB device.
System answerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1
"USB""USB"2
"PLAY"3
240
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 243/266
USB Track You can choose a track on your USB devicedirectly.
System answerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNAL DEVICE"1
"USB""USB"2
"TRACK NUMBER PLEASE""TRACK"3
"TRACK <number>""<a number between 1 and 99>"*4
* Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to four single digits (for example "2", "4","5" for track 245)
External devices - iPod
These voice commands support thefunctionality of an iPod which may beconnected to the audio unit.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "IPOD"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"TRACK"*
"PLAYLIST"**
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE PLAYLIST"
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.
241
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 244/266
iPod Track You can choose a track off the all titles listof your iPod directly.
System answerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNALDEVICE"
1
"IPOD""IPOD"2
"TRACK NUMBERPLEASE"
"TRACK"*3
"TRACK <number>""<a numberbetween 1 and
99>"**
4
* Can be used as a shortcut.
** Additionally, numbers can be spoken as up to five single digits (for example "5", "2","4", "5", "3" for track 52453), to a limit of 65535.
iPod playlist
You can choose a playlist from your iPoddirectly.
System answerUser saysSteps
"EXTERNAL DEVICE""EXTERNALDEVICE"
1
"IPOD""IPOD"2
"PLAYLIST NUMBERPLEASE"
"PLAYLIST"*3
"PLAYLIST <number>""<a numberbetween 1 and 10>"
4
* Playlists activated by voice control must be assigned special filenames.
External devices - Bluetooth
These voice commands support thefunctionality of Bluetooth which may beconnected to the audio unit.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
242
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 245/266
"EXTERNAL DEVICE", "BLUETOOTH"
"HELP"
"PLAY"
"SHUFFLE ALL"
"SHUFFLE OFF"
"REPEAT TRACK"
"REPEAT OFF"
TELEPHONE COMMANDS
Phone
Your phone system allows you to createan additional phonebook. The storedentries can be dialed by voice control.Phone numbers stored by using voicecontrol are stored on the vehicle systemand not in your phone.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"PHONE"
"HELP"
"MOBILE NAME"*
"DIAL NUMBER"*
"DIAL NAME"*
"DELETE NAME"
"DELETE DIRECTORY"
"PLAY DIRECTORY"
"STORE NAME"
"REDIAL"*
243
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 246/266
"PHONE"
"ACCEPT CALLS"
"REJECT CALLS"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Phone functions
Dial number
Phone numbers can be dialed after givingthe name tag voice command.
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"NUMBER PLEASE""DIAL NUMBER"*2
"<phone number>"<phone number>"3CONTINUE?"
"DIALLING""DIAL"4
"<repeat last part of number>"CORRECTION"
CONTINUE?"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Dial name
Phone numbers can be dialed after givingthe name tag voice command.
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1"NAME PLEASE""DIAL NAME"
*2
"DIAL <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"DIALLING""YES"4
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
244
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 247/266
Redial This function allows you to redial the lastdialed phone number.
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"REDIAL""REDIAL"*2
"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"DIALLING""YES"3
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Mobile name
This function allows you to access phonenumbers stored with a name tag in yourmobile phone.
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"MOBILE NAME" "<phone
dependent dialogue>"
"MOBILE NAME"*2
* Can be used as a shortcut.
DTMF (Tone dialling)
This function transfers spoken numbersinto DTMF tones. For example, to make aremote enquiry to your home answeringmachine or to enter a PIN number etc.
Note: DTMF can only be used during anongoing call. Operate the VOICE button and wait for the system prompt.
Can only be used with vehicles installed with a dedicated VOICE button.
System answerUser saysSteps
"NUMBER PLEASE"1
"<numbers 1 to 9, zero, hash, star>"2
245
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 248/266
Create a phonebook
Store name
New entries can be stored with the"STORE NAME" command. This featurecan be used to dial a number by calling upthe name instead of the full phone number.
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"STORE NAME""STORE NAME"2"NAME PLEASE"
"REPEAT NAME PLEASE""<name>"3
"STORING NAME""<name>"4"<name> STORED"
"NUMBER PLEASE"
"<phone number>""<phone number>"5
"STORING NUMBER""STORE"6"<phone number>""NUMBER STORED"
Delete name
Stored names can also be deleted from
the directory.
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"NAME PLEASE""DELETE NAME"2
"DELETE <name>""<name>"3"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"<name> DELETED""YES"4
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
Play directory
Use this function to let the system tell youall stored entries.
246
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 249/266
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"PLAY DIRECTORY""PLAY DIRECTORY"2
Delete directory
This function allows you to delete allentries in one go.
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"DELETE DIRECTORY""DELETE DIRECTORY"2"CONFIRM YES OR NO"
"DIRECTORY DELETED""YES"3
"COMMAND CANCELLED""NO"
Main settings
Reject calls
Calls can be set to be automaticallyrejected using voice control.
System answerUser saysSteps
"PHONE""PHONE"1
"REJECT CALLS""REJECT CALLS"2
"ACCEPT CALLS""ACCEPT CALLS"*
* use this command to turn the reject mode off
247
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 250/266
CLIMATE CONTROLCOMMANDS
ClimateThe climate voice commands supports thefunctionality of the fan speed, temperatureand mode settings. Not all functions are
available on all vehicles.
Overview
The overview below shows the availablevoice commands. The following lists willgive further information about thecomplete command menu in selectedexamples.
"CLIMATE"
"HELP"
"FAN"*
"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING ON"*
"DEFROSTING/DEMISTING OFF"*
"TEMPERATURE"*
"AUTO MODE"*
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Fan
This function allows you to adjust the fanspeed.
System answerUser saysSteps
"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
"FAN SPEED PLEASE""‘FAN"*2
"FAN MINIMUM""MINIMUM"
3 "FAN <number>""<a number between 1 and 7>"
"FAN MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
248
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 251/266
Defrosting/Demisting
System answerUser saysSteps
"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
"DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING ON""DEFROSTING ON/DEMISTING
ON"*
2"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING
OFF"
"DEFROSTING OFF/DEMISTING
OFF"*
* Can be used as a shortcut.
TemperatureThis function allows you to adjust thetemperature.
System answerUser saysSteps
"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
"TEMPERATURE PLEASE""TEMPERATURE"*2
"TEMPERATURE MINIMUM""MINIMUM"
3 "TEMPERATURE <number>""<a number between 15 and 29 °C
with 0.5 increments>" or "<anumber between 59 and 84 °F>"
"TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM""MAXIMUM"
* Can be used as a shortcut.
Auto mode
System answerUser saysSteps
"CLIMATE""CLIMATE"1
"AUTO MODE""AUTO MODE"*2
* Can be used as a shortcut. Can be deactivated by selecting a different temperature orfan speed.
249
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Voice control
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 252/266
TYPE APPROVALS
FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE
This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.
FCC ID: WJLRX-42
IC: 7847A-RX42
Changes or modifications to your devicenot expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance can void theuser's authority to operate the equipment.
RX-42 - declaration of conformity
We, the party responsible for compliance,declare under our sole responsibility thatthe Handset Integration product RX-42 isin conformity with the provisions of the
following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. Acopy of the Declaration of Conformity canbe found at:
www.novero.com/declaration_of_conformity
The Bluetooth word mark and logos areowned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and anyuse of such marks by Ford Motor Companyis under license. Other trademarks andtrade names are those of their respectiveowners.
ELECTROMAGNETICCOMPATIBILITY
WARNINGSYour vehicle has been tested andcertified to legislations relating toelectromagnetic compatibility
(72/245/EEC, UN ECE Regulation 10 orother applicable local requirements). It isyour responsibility to ensure that anyequipment you have fitted complies withapplicable local legislations. Have anyequipment fitted by properly trainedtechnicians.
The RF (radio frequency) transmitterequipment (e.g. cellular telephones,amateur radio transmitters etc.) may
only be fitted to your vehicle if they complywith the parameters shown in the tablebelow. There are no special provisions orconditions for installations or use.
Do not mount any transceiver,microphones, speakers, or any otheritem in the deployment path of the
airbag system.Do not fasten antenna cables tooriginal vehicle wiring, fuel pipes andbrake pipes.
Keep antenna and power cables atleast 10 centimeters (4 inches) fromany electronic modules and airbags.
250
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Appendices
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 253/266
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (PeakRMS)
Frequency BandMHz
8100 W1 - 30
3, 4, 5100 W50 - 54
3, 4, 550 W68 – 87.5
3, 4, 550 W142–
1763, 4, 550 W220 - 225
3, 4, 550 W380 – 512
3, 4, 5, 6*, 7
*10 W806 – 870
3, 4, 5, 6*, 7
*10 W870 - 940
3, 4, 510 W1200 – 1400
3, 4, 5, 6
*
, 7
*10 W1710 – 1885
3, 4, 5, 6*, 7
*10 W1885 – 2025
*Only for GSM/3G cellular phones, with a patch antenna installed inside of the front
windshield.
Note: Position 6 & 7 are patch antennas, 8is the towbar.
251
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Appendices
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 254/266
Note: After the installation of RF transmitters, check for disturbances from and to all electrical equipment in thevehicle, both in the standby and transmit
modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
• with the ignition ON
• with the engine running
• during a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fieldsgenerated inside the vehicle cabin by thetransmitter installed do not exceedapplicable human exposure requirements.
252
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Appendices
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 255/266
44WD
See: Four-Wheel Drive........................................97
AA/C
See: Climate Control...........................................65
About This Manual...........................................7Protecting the Environment................................7
ABSSee: Brakes...........................................................103
ABS driving hintsSee: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................103Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................10
Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................39Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................65
Air Vents............................................................65Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm........................................34
Alternative frequencies..............................219
Antenna...........................................................227Anti-Theft Alarm............................................34Alarm System........................................................34
Arming the Alarm.................................................35
Disarming the Alarm...........................................35
Full and Reduced Guard....................................35
Triggering the Alarm............................................35
Appendices....................................................250Approach Lamps............................................47Ashtray................................................................81At a Glance........................................................12
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............57Alarm warning.......................................................58
Direction indicator................................................57
Direction indicators warning.............................57
Door open warning...............................................57Home safe...............................................................57
Key in ignition warning.......................................58
Lights on warning.................................................57
Low fuel level warning........................................57
Low washer fluid warning.................................58
Missed lock warning...........................................58
Not in park warning..............................................57
One side park light...............................................57
Over speed warning............................................58
Parking brake warning........................................57
Restraints back-up warning.............................57Safety belt minder................................................57
Audio Control...................................................39Type 1........................................................................39
Type 2.......................................................................40
Audio introduction......................................204Audio system care........................................227Audio System Security................................213Audio troubleshooting...............................228Audio Troubleshooting..............................228Audio Unit Clock and Date
Displays.........................................................214Audio unit commands...............................235Auxiliary input.....................................................239
CD Player...............................................................235
External devices - Bluetooth.........................242
External devices - iPod.....................................241
External devices - USB....................................240
Radio......................................................................236
Audio unit menus.........................................219Audio unit operation....................................216Audio unit overview ...................................205Autolamps........................................................44
253
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 256/266
Automatic Climate Control........................68Air distribution control.......................................68
Blower......................................................................68
Cooling the interior quickly...............................69
Recirculated air.....................................................69Switching off the automatic climate
control.................................................................70
Switching the air conditioning on and
off..........................................................................70
Temperature control...........................................69
Windshield defrosting and demisting..........70
Automatic Transmission.............................93Emergency Park Position Release
Lever....................................................................96
Hints on driving with an automatic
transmission.....................................................95Selector lever positions.....................................93
Sport Mode and Manual Shifting..................94
Automatic volume control........................219Autostore control..........................................217
Type 0 and 1...........................................................217
Type 2, 3, 4 and 5.................................................217
Autowipers........................................................41Auxiliary input jack......................................226Auxiliary Power Points..................................79
12 Volt DC Power Point.......................................79
Location...................................................................79
BBluetooth setup...........................................230
Handling of phones..........................................230
Requirements for Bluetooth
connection......................................................230
Bonnet LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood...........150
Brake and Clutch Fluid Check.................160Brakes...............................................................103
Principle of Operation.......................................103
Breaking-In......................................................132Brakes and Clutch...............................................132
Engine......................................................................132
Tires..........................................................................132
Bulb Specification Chart...........................168
CCapacities and Specifications.................182
Car WashSee: Cleaning the Exterior................................172
Catalytic Converter.......................................88Driving with a Catalytic Converter.................88
Center Console...............................................80Changing a Bulb............................................162
Approach Lamp and Side Repeater...........164
Central High Mounted Brake Lamp.............167
Front Fog Lamps................................................164
Headlamp..............................................................163
Interior Lamp.......................................................166
License Plate Lamp...........................................165
Reading Lamp.....................................................166
Rear Lamps..........................................................164
Side Lamp and Direction Indicator..............163
Side Repeater......................................................163Changing a Fuse...........................................149Changing a Road Wheel.............................174
Installing a Road Wheel...................................179
Jacking and Lifting Points.................................177
Lug Nuts..................................................................174
Removing a Road Wheel..................................178
Spare Wheel..........................................................177
Stowing the Flat Tire.........................................180
Vehicle Jack...........................................................175
Vehicles with a Spare Wheel..........................174
Changing the 12V Battery...........................161Auxiliary Battery...................................................161
Main Battery..........................................................161
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................161Checking the Wiper Blades.......................161Child Safety.......................................................18Child Safety Locks..........................................23
Left-hand side.......................................................23
Right-hand side.....................................................23
Child Seat Positioning...................................21Cigar Lighter.....................................................79Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.........................173Cleaning the Exterior....................................172
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts.......................172
Cleaning the Chrome Trim...............................172
Cleaning the Headlamps..................................172
Underbody.............................................................172
Using a Car Wash................................................172
254
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 257/266
Cleaning the Interior.....................................172Instrument Cluster Screens, LCD Screens
and Radio Screens.........................................173
Rear Windows......................................................173
Safety Belts...........................................................172Climate Control..............................................65
Principle of Operation........................................65
Climate control commands....................248Climate..................................................................248
Clock....................................................................61Cold Weather Precautions........................132Compact disc playback..............................221Compact Disc Player...................................221Compact disc track scanning..................222
Type 1......................................................................222
Type 2.....................................................................222Type 3, 4 and 5....................................................222
Coolant CheckSee: Engine Coolant Check............................159
Cool Box.............................................................81Cruise Control.................................................40
Principle of Operation........................................116
Cruise controlSee: Using Cruise Control.................................116
Cup Holders.....................................................80
DData Recording..................................................9Daytime Running Lamps.............................45Diesel Particulate Filter...............................84
Regeneration.........................................................84
Digital signal processing (DSP)..............219Changing the DSP settings.............................219
DSP equalizer.......................................................219
DSP occupancy...................................................219
Direction Indicators........................................47DPF
See: Diesel Particulate Filter............................84
Draining the Fuel Filter Water Trap........160Driver Airbag.....................................................27Driver Knee Airbag.........................................29Driving Hints....................................................132Driving Through Water................................133DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................45
EElectromagnetic compatibility...............250Electronic Locking Differential................102Ending compact disc playback..............225Engine Coolant Check................................159
Adding Engine Coolant.....................................159
Engine ImmobilizerSee: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................34
Engine Oil Check...........................................158Adding Oil..............................................................158
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.2L Duratorq-TDCi(Puma) Diesel/3.2L Duratorq-TDCi(Puma) Diesel............................................158
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.5L Duratec-HE
(122kW/165PS) - MI4..............................158Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Exterior Mirrors.................................................51Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................52
Manual Folding and Unfolding.........................51
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................51
FFastening the Safety Belts..........................24
Using Safety Belts During Pregnancy...........25Fast forward/reverse...................................221First Aid Kit......................................................135Floor Mats........................................................133Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps........................................45
Fog Lamps - RearSee: Rear Fog Lamps..........................................46
Four-Wheel Drive...........................................97Principle of Operation.........................................97
Front Exterior Overview.................................12
Front Fog Lamps............................................45Adjustment.............................................................45
Control lever...........................................................45
Fuel and Refueling........................................86Technical Specifications....................................91
Fuel Consumption.........................................90Calculating Fuel Economy...............................90
Filling the Fuel Tank............................................90
Fuel ConsumptionSee: Technical Specifications..........................91
255
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 258/266
Fuel Quality......................................................87Long-Term Storage..............................................87
Fuse Box Locations......................................138Auxiliary Fuse Box..............................................139
Engine Compartment Fuse Box....................138Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............138
Fuses.................................................................138Fuse Specification Chart...........................140
Auxiliary Fuse Box...............................................147
Engine Compartment Fuse Box...................140
Passenger Compartment Fuse Box............145
GGauges...............................................................53
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge............53Fuel Gauge..............................................................53
Information Display.............................................53
Tachometer............................................................53
General Driving Points.................................132Vehicles with a diesel engine.........................132
General Information on RadioFrequencies....................................................31
Glasses Holder.................................................81Glove Box..........................................................80
Driver Side..............................................................80
Passenger Side.....................................................80
HHandbrake
See: Parking Brake.............................................103
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................135HDC
See: Using Hill Descent Control....................109
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................44Headlamp Leveling.......................................46Head Restraints..............................................76
Adjusting the head restraints...........................76
Removing the head restraints.........................76
Heated Seats...................................................78Heated Windows and Mirrors....................70
Heated Exterior Mirror..........................................71
Heated Rear Window..........................................70
Heated Windshield..............................................70
HeatingSee: Climate Control...........................................65
Hill Start Assist.............................................104Enable and Disable the System...................104
Switching the System On and Off...............105
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................104
Hints on Driving With Anti-LockBrakes............................................................103
Hood LockSee: Opening and Closing the Hood...........150
IIgnition Switch.................................................82Important audio information..................204
Audio unit labels................................................204
Disc labels............................................................204
Information Displays.....................................59General Information............................................59
Installing Child Seats.....................................18Attaching a Child Seat with Top
Tethers................................................................20
Booster Seats.........................................................19
Child Seats for Different Mass Groups..........18
ISOFIX Anchor Points.........................................20
Top Tether Anchor Points.................................20
Instrument Cluster.........................................53Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................44
Instrument Panel Overview.........................15Interior Lamps..................................................47Courtesy lamp........................................................47
Reading lamps......................................................48
Interior Mirror...................................................50Auto-Dimming Mirror...........................................51
Introduction.........................................................7
JJump Starting the Vehicle.........................136
To Connect the Booster Cables.....................137
To Start the Engine.............................................137
KKeys and Remote Controls..........................31
256
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 259/266
LLighting Control..............................................43
High Beams............................................................44
Parking Lamps......................................................43Lighting..............................................................43
General Information............................................43
Limited Slip Differential.............................102Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............120
Load Carrying..................................................118General Information...........................................118
Loading the navigation data....................196Loading the navigation data..........................196
Load Retaining Fixtures...............................121
Load Rest...............................................................123Tie Down Points...................................................121
Locking and Unlocking.................................36Child play protection function.........................37
Driver configuration mode.................................37
Locking and unlocking the doors from
inside....................................................................37
Locking and unlocking the doors with the
key.........................................................................36
Locking and unlocking the doors with the
remote control.................................................36
Locking the doors individually with thekey.........................................................................38
Locks...................................................................36Luggage Covers..............................................118
Locking and lunlocking into positions.........118
Operation................................................................118
Lug NutsSee: Changing a Road Wheel.........................174
M
Maintenance..................................................150General Information..........................................150
Technical Specifications..................................169
Manual Climate Control..............................65Air distribution control.......................................65
Blower......................................................................66
Recirculated air.....................................................66
System settings....................................................66
Temperature control...........................................66
Manual Seats...................................................72Adjusting the Height of the Driver's
Seat.......................................................................73
Adjusting the Lumbar Support........................73
Folding the Seatback - Stretch cab...............74Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward...............................................................73
Recline Adjustment.............................................74
Manual Transmission...................................93Selecting Reverse Gear......................................93
Map updates.................................................203Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................59
MirrorsSee: Heated Windows and Mirrors................70
See: Windows and Mirrors................................49Mobile Communications
Equipment......................................................10MP3 display options...................................224
CD text display options....................................224
MP3 file playback.........................................222File formats..........................................................223
ID3 Tag Version 2................................................224
ISO 9660 format................................................222
MP3 files playback order.................................223
MP3 navigation...................................................224
Multi session........................................................223Playing a multi session disc...........................223
NNavigation introduction..............................191
General Information...........................................191
Navigation Quick start................................193Vehicles with SD navigation system...........193
Navigation system......................................200Navigation unit overview...........................194
Vehicles with SD navigation system...........195
News broadcasts..........................................219
OOil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.......................................158
On/off control................................................216Opening and Closing the Hood...............150
Closing the hood..................................................151
Opening the hood..............................................150
257
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 260/266
PParking Aid........................................................111Parking Aids......................................................111
Principle of Operation.........................................111Parking Brake.................................................103Passenger Airbag...........................................28
.....................................................................................28
Fitting the Passenger Airbag Deactivation
Switch..................................................................28
Switching the Passenger Airbag Off.............28
Switching the Passenger Airbag On.............29
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................34Arming the Engine Immobilizer......................34
Coded Keys.............................................................34
Disarming the Engine Immobilizer.................34Principle of Operation........................................34
PATSSee: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................34
Personalized Settings...................................63Language setting..................................................63
Units of measure..................................................64
Power Door LocksSee: Locking and Unlocking.............................36
Power Seats......................................................74Adjusting the Height of the Driver's
Seat.......................................................................75Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward...............................................................75
Recline Adjustment.............................................75
Tilting the Seat......................................................76
Power Steering Fluid Check.....................159Adding Power Steering Fluid..........................159
Power Windows.............................................49Accessory Delay...................................................50
Bounce-Back.........................................................49
One-Touch Down.................................................49
One-Touch Up.......................................................49
Window Lock.........................................................49
RRear Axle..........................................................102Rear Exterior Overview..................................13Rear Fog Lamps.............................................46Rear Seat Armrest..........................................81
Rear Seats.........................................................76Folding the Seatback..........................................77
Folding the Seat Cushion...................................77
Unfolding the Seatback.....................................78
Unfolding the Seat Cushion..............................77Rear View Camera.........................................113
Switching the Rear View Camera Off..........115
Switching the Rear View Camera On...........113
Using the Display.................................................113
Rear View CameraSee: Rear View Camera.....................................113
Recommended Towing Weights............126Reduced Engine Performance.................132Refueling...........................................................88
Vehicles with Fuel Filler Cap............................88
Vehicles without Fuel Filler Cap.....................89Regional mode (REG)...............................220Remote Control................................................31
Changing the Remote Control Battery.........32
Programming a New Remote Control...........31
Programming the additional key.....................31
Remote Control With a Folding Key
Blade....................................................................32
Reprogramming the Unlocking
Function...............................................................31
Repairing Minor Paint Damage................173
Repeat compact disc tracks.....................221Type 1.......................................................................221
Type 2.....................................................................222
Type 3, 4 and 5....................................................222
Replacement PartsRecommendation........................................10Collision Repairs....................................................10
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................10
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................10
Replacing a Lost Key or RemoteControl.............................................................33
Road Safety.....................................................191Safety information.............................................192
Roadside Emergencies...............................135Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................120Route displays...............................................201
Junction zoom.....................................................201
Map display..........................................................201
Navigation display..............................................201
258
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 261/266
Route options menu..................................200Driver......................................................................200
Dynamic...............................................................200
Eco settings.........................................................200
Ferry/motorail....................................................200Motorway.............................................................200
Route.....................................................................200
Seasonal roads....................................................201
Toll..........................................................................200
Toll sticker.............................................................201
Running-InSee: Breaking-In..................................................132
Running Out of Fuel......................................87
SSafety Belt Height Adjustment.................25Safety Belt Minder.........................................26
Switching the Safety Belt Minder Off...........26
Safety Belts......................................................24Principle of Operation.........................................24
Safety Precautions........................................86Seats....................................................................72Security code..................................................213
Entering a security code...................................213
Security..............................................................34
Setting the clock on the audio unit........214...................................................................................215
Changing the time..............................................214
Exact hour adjustment.....................................214
Shuffle/random.............................................221Type 1.......................................................................221
Type 2......................................................................221
Type 3, 4 and 5.....................................................221
Side Airbags.....................................................29Side Curtain Airbags.....................................29Sitting in the Correct Position....................72Sliding Windows.............................................52Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains...................................174
Sound button.................................................216Special Notices................................................10Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................116
Stability Control............................................107Principle of Operation.......................................107
Starter SwitchSee: Ignition Switch.............................................82
Starting a Diesel Engine..............................84Cold or Hot Engine..............................................84
Failure to Start......................................................84
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................83Cold or Hot Engine...............................................83Engine Idle Speed after Starting....................83
Failure to Start......................................................84
Flooded Engine.....................................................83
Starting and Stopping the Engine...........82General Information............................................82
Station preset buttons................................217....................................................................................217
Type 0 and 1...........................................................217
Type 2, 3, 4 and 5.................................................217
Station tuning control.................................216
Manual tuning......................................................216Scan tuning...........................................................216
Seek tuning...........................................................216
Steering Wheel Lock.....................................82Unlocking the Steering Wheel........................83
Vehicles without Keyless Starting.................82
Steering Wheel...............................................39Storage Compartments..............................80Supplementary Restraints System..........27
Principle of Operation.........................................27
Switching Off the Engine............................85
Vehicles With a Turbocharger.........................85Symbols Glossary.............................................7System settings.............................................197
Audio settings......................................................198
Clock settings......................................................198
Menu structure - Information and
entertainment display - All
vehicles.............................................................198
Menu structure - Information and
entertainment display - Vehicles with
navigation system..........................................197
TTailgate.............................................................124
Lowering the Tailgate........................................124
Technical SpecificationsSee: Capacities and Specifications.............182
259
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 262/266
Telephone commands...............................243Create a phonebook.........................................246
Main settings........................................................247
Phone.....................................................................243
Phone functions.................................................244Telephone controls......................................231
Remote control....................................................231
Telephone setup..........................................229Bond another Bluetooth phone...................230
Making a phone an active phone.................229
Phonebook...........................................................229
Phonebook categories.....................................229
Telephone.......................................................229General Information.........................................229
Terrain Response..........................................109
Principle of Operation......................................109Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.......................................174
Tow Ball............................................................1294x2............................................................................129
4x2 (vehicles with increased ride height)
and 4x4.............................................................130
Driving without a trailer....................................130
Maintenance........................................................130
Towbar Dimensions.....................................187Towing a Trailer..............................................125
Trailer Tow Module.............................................125Towing Points................................................130Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels.......131
All Vehicles.............................................................131
Vehicles With Automatic
Transmission....................................................131
Towing...............................................................125Track selection...............................................221
Type 2, 3, 4 and 5................................................221
Type 3, 4 and 5.....................................................221
Traction Control............................................106Principle of Operation......................................106
Traffic information control........................218Activating traffic announcements...............218
Ending traffic announcements......................218
Traffic announcement volume......................218
Traffic Message Channel..........................202Principle of Operation......................................202
Trailer Sway Control....................................126Transmission....................................................93Transmission
See: Transmission................................................93
Trip Computer..................................................61Controls....................................................................61
Type approvals.............................................250FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE.............250
RX-42 - declaration of conformity..............250
UUnder Hood Overview - 2.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel.............154Under Hood Overview - 2.5L Duratec-HE
(122kW/165PS) - MI4...............................152Under Hood Overview - 3.2L
Duratorq-TDCi (Puma) Diesel.............156Using Cruise Control.....................................116
Switching Cruise Control Off...........................117Switching Cruise Control On...........................116
Using Four-Wheel Drive...............................97Driving in Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive............................................98
Four-Wheel Drive, High Range (4H).............97
Four-Wheel Drive, Low Range (4L)...............97
Shifting Between 2H and 4H...........................97
Shifting Between 2H and 4L...........................98
Shifting Between 4H and 4L...........................98
Two-Wheel Drive, High Range (2H)..............97
Using Hill Descent Control.......................109HDC Operation....................................................109
Selecting HDC.....................................................109
Using Snow Chains......................................174Vehicles with Stability Control.......................174
Using Stability Control................................1072-wheel drive vehicles......................................107
4-wheel drive vehicles......................................107
Using the telephone....................................231Changing the active phone............................232
Debonding a bonded phone..........................233
Making a call.........................................................231
Muting the microphone...................................232
Receiving an incoming call.............................232
Receiving a second incoming call................232
Using TMC......................................................202Ending traffic announcements.....................202
Hazard spot warning (depending on
country)............................................................202
Traffic announcement.....................................202
Using TMC messages......................................202
Using Traction Control...............................106
260
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 263/266
Using voice control......................................234Name tag..............................................................235
System operation..............................................234
Using Winter Tires.........................................174
VVehicle Care.....................................................172Vehicle Dimensions.....................................182
4-door stretch cab.............................................183
Double cab............................................................185
Single cab..............................................................182
Vehicle Identification Number................190Vehicle Identification Plate......................190Vehicle Interior Overview..............................14
VentilationSee: Climate Control...........................................65
VentsSee: Air Vents.........................................................65
VINSee: Vehicle Identification Number............190
Voice control..................................................234Principle of Operation......................................234
Voice Control...................................................40
WWarning Lamps and Indicators.................53
ABS warning lamp...............................................54
Airbag warning lamp..........................................54Brake system warning lamp............................54
Cruise control.........................................................57
Direction indicators.............................................56
Door open warning lamp..................................56
DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter)........................56
Electronic locking differential (ELD)
indicator..............................................................55
Engine warning lamps........................................55
Four-wheel drive indicator................................55
Four-wheel drive low (4L) indicator.............55
Front fog lamp indicator....................................56Gear shift indicator lamp (Manual
only)......................................................................57
Glow plug indicator - For Diesel
vehicles...............................................................56
Headlamp indicator............................................56
High beam indicator............................................56
Ice/Frost warning indicator..............................56
Ignition warning lamp.........................................54
Low fuel level warning lamp............................54
Oil Change Reminder Indicator (Diesel
only).....................................................................55Oil pressure warning lamp................................55
Rear fog lamp indicator.....................................56
Safety belt indicator............................................57
Stability control (ESP) indicator....................54
Vehicle immobilizer indicator..........................54
Washer fluid level indicator..............................56
Water-in-fuel indicator (Diesel only)...........56
Warning Triangle...........................................135Double cab............................................................136
Single cab..............................................................135
Stretch cab............................................................135
Washer Fluid Check......................................161Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior................................172
See: Wipers and Washers..................................41
Waveband button........................................216Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................174
Wheels and Tires...........................................174General Information...........................................174
Technical Specifications.................................180
261
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 264/266
Windows and Mirrors...................................49Windshield Washers.....................................42Windshield Wipers..........................................41
Intermittent wipe..................................................41
Winter TiresSee: Using Winter Tires.....................................174
Wipers and Washers......................................41
262
Ranger (TKE) Vehicles Built From: 27-01-2014, DB39120609AC (CG3575en) enGBR, Edition date: 12/2013
Index
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 265/266
7/21/2019 Ford Ranger Manual
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ford-ranger-manual 266/266